Ford 2000 Escort Automobile User Manual

Contents
Before driving
Introduction
2
Instrumentation
6
Controls and features
Seating and safety restraints
31
135
Starting and driving
Starting
182
Driving
187
Roadside emergencies
225
Servicing
Maintenance and care
251
Capacities and specifications
304
Customer assistance
313
Reporting safety defects
325
Index
326
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including
photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation
in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company.
Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2002 Ford Motor Company
1
Introduction
The following warning may be required by California law:
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
ICONS
Indicates a safety alert. Read the
following section on Warnings.
Indicates vehicle information related
to recycling and other
environmental concerns will follow.
Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste
cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards
protecting the environment.
Indicates a message regarding child
safety restraints. Refer to Seating
and safety restraints for more
information.
Indicates that this Owner Guide
contains information on this subject.
Please refer to the Index to locate
the appropriate section which will
provide you more information.
WARNINGS
Warnings provide information which may reduce the risk of personal
injury and prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and its
equipment.
2
Introduction
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During
the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is
recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in.
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE
The information found in this guide was in effect at the time of printing.
Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring
obligation.
EMISSION WARRANTY
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage,
Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L Power Stroke
Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions
Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description of
what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that
is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
3
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side
Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Tether
Anchorage
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Traction Control
AdvanceTrac
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Power Windows
Front/Rear
4
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Emission System
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check fuel cap
Low tire warning
5
Instrumentation
Wiper/washer control
(pg. 97)
Instrument cluster
(pg. 8)
Turn signal lever
(pg. 91)
Headlamp control
(pg. 31)
Instrument panel dimmer
control
(pg. 32)
Reverse sensing system*
(pg. 33)
Speed controls
(pg. 92)
* if equipped
6
Driver air bag
(pg. 163)
Steering wheel controls*
(pg. 98)
Instrumentation
Gearshift (including
overdrive button)
(pg. 196)
Audio system
(pg. 55)
Message center
(pg. 19)
Climate controls
(pg. 36)
4wd control*
(pg. 201)
Power adjustable foot
pedals*
(pg. 33)
7
Instrumentation
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Standard instrument cluster
CHECK
GAGE
O/D
OFF
4X4
LOW
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
4X4
HIGH
BRAKE
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
WASH
CHECK
FUEL
CAP
TRIP
Optional instrument cluster
HI TEMP
LOW OIL
O/D
OFF
4X4
LOW
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
4X4
HIGH
BRAKE
Service engine soon
Illuminates briefly to ensure the
SERVICE
system is functional. If it comes on
ENGINE
after the engine is started, one of
SOON
the engine’s emission control
systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a
driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and
will not require towing.
Light turns on solid:
Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
8
Instrumentation
3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely
tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly
installing and securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles
without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the light
should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is
required.
If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available
opportunity.
Light is blinking:
Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter.
You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available
opportunity.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Check fuel cap (if equipped)
Illuminates when the fuel cap is not
CHECK
installed correctly. Check the fuel
FUEL
cap for proper installation. When
CAP
the fuel filler cap is properly
re-installed, the light(s) will turn off
after a period of normal driving. Continuing to operate the vehicle with
the fuel cap mis-installed can activate the Service Engine Soon/Check
Engine warning light.
It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an
improperly installed fuel filler cap.
For more information, refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and
care chapter.
9
Instrumentation
Air bag readiness
Illuminates to confirm that the air
bags (front or side) are operational.
If the light fails to illuminate,
continues to flash or remains on,
have the system serviced
immediately.
Safety belt
Illuminates to remind you to fasten
your safety belts. For more
information, refer to the Seating
and safety restraints chapter.
Brake system warning
To confirm the brake system
warning light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
(alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON
position to START position, the light will momentarily illuminate prior to
reaching the START position). It also illuminates if the parking brake is
engaged. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate as
described, seek service immediately. Illumination after the parking brake
is released indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction
and the brake system should be serviced immediately by a qualified
technician. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information.
Check gage (if equipped)
Illuminates when the engine coolant
CHECK
temperature is high, the engine oil
GAGE
pressure is low or the fuel gauge is
at or near empty. Refer to Engine
coolant temperature gauge, Engine oil pressure gauge or Fuel gauge
in this chapter for more information.
10
Instrumentation
Oil pressure/Engine coolant
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is above the normal
range or the engine oil pressure is
outside normal range. Check the
engine oil and coolant level refer to
Adding engine oil and Adding coolant in the Maintenance and care
chapter.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
To confirm the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) warning light is
ABS
functional it will momentarily
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to the ON position
(alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON
position to the START position, the light will momentarily illuminate just
prior to reaching the START position). If the light remains on, continues
to flash or fails to illuminate, have the ABS serviced immediately. If the
ABS light remains on, it means the anti-lock brake system has
malfunctioned and is disabled, however, the normal brake system will
still function unless the brake warning light also remains illuminated and
parking brake is off. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more
information.
Turn signal
Illuminates when the turn signals or
the hazard lights are turned on. If
the lights stay on continuously or
flash faster, check for a burned-out bulb.
High beams
Illuminates when the high beam
headlamps are turned on.
11
Instrumentation
Low washer fluid (if equipped)
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
LOW
WASH
Charging system
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly.
AdvanceTracY (if equipped)
Flashes when the AdvanceTracy
system is active. If the light remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately.
For more information, refer to the
Driving chapter.
Four wheel drive low (if equipped)
Illuminates when four-wheel drive
low is is engaged. If the light
continues to flash have the system
serviced.
4x4
LOW
Four wheel drive high (if equipped)
Illuminates when four-wheel drive is
put in high range. If the light
continues to flash have the system
serviced.
4x4
HIGH
Door ajar
Illuminates when any door is open
(or not fully closed).
12
DOOR
AJAR
Instrumentation
O/D off (if equipped)
Illuminates when the overdrive
O/D
function has been turned OFF using
OFF
the Transmission Control Switch
(TCS) on end of gearshift. If the
light does not come on or the light flashes steadily, have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, as damage to the transmission could occur.
Speed control
Illuminates when the speed control
is activated.
Seat belt warning chime
Sounds to remind you to fasten your seat belts.
BeltMinderY chime
Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts.
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime
Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front
or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint
system inspected immediately.
Key-in-ignition warning chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the driver’s door is
opened.
Headlamps on warning chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed
from the ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
13
Instrumentation
GAUGES
Standard instrument cluster gauges
CHECK
GAGE
O/D
OFF
4X4
LOW
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
4X4
HIGH
BRAKE
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
WASH
CHECK
FUEL
CAP
TRIP
Optional instrument cluster gauges
HI TEMP
LOW OIL
O/D
OFF
4X4
LOW
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
4X4
HIGH
BRAKE
Speedometer
Indicates the current vehicle speed.
14
Instrumentation
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant. At normal operating
temperature, the needle remains
within the normal area (the
indicated area between the “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine immediately
and let the engine cool. Refer to
Engine coolant in the
Maintenance and care chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot. Steam and scalding liquid from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly.
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the
coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication
will not be accurate.
Odometer
Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle.
• Standard instrument cluster
TRIP
• Optional instrument cluster
Refer to Message Center in this section for information on how to switch
the display from metric to English measurements.
15
Instrumentation
Trip odometer
Registers the kilometers (miles) of individual journeys.
• Standard instrument cluster
Press and release the
SELECT/RESET button to toggle
between the odometer and trip
odometer display. Press and hold
the button to reset.
• Optional instrument cluster
Press and release the TRIP/RESET
button to toggle between the
odometer and trip odometer display.
Press and hold the button to reset.
Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer in the red zone may damage
the engine.
Battery voltage gauge
Indicates battery voltage. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range, have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
as soon as possible.
16
TRIP
Instrumentation
Engine oil pressure gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. At
normal operating temperature, the
needle will be in the normal range
(the area between the “L” and “H”);
if the needle goes below the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and switch off the
engine immediately. Check the oil
level. Add oil if needed (refer to
Engine oil in the Maintenance
and care chapter). If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked
at your dealership or by a qualified technician.
Fuel gauge
Displays approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank. The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
When refueling the vehicle from
empty indication, the amount of fuel
that can be added will be less than
the advertised capacity due to the
reserve fuel.
The FUEL DOOR icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS/TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
The outside temperature display is
contained in the instrument cluster
and displays all the time. If
equipped with the DEATC climate
control system, the outside
temperature will be displayed there.
To turn the display off or change the display from English to metric see
your dealer.
Compass
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas.
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also
affect compass accuracy.
17
Instrumentation
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
3. Locate compass sensor mounted
at base of mirror.
4. Insert a paperclip into the small
hole on the bottom of the compass
sensor or press the button on the
top of the compass module until
ZONE appears in the instrument cluster display.
5. Release pressure on the paperclip or button and then slowly press it
down again.
6. Continue to press until ZONE
appears in the instrument cluster
display, then release. The display
should show the current zone
number.
7. Press until the desired zone
number appears. The display will flash and then return to normal
operation. The zone is now updated.
18
Instrumentation
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines:
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Locate compass sensor mounted at base of mirror.
3. Insert a paperclip into the small
hole on the bottom of the compass
sensor or press the button on the
top of the compass module until
ZONE appears in the instrument
cluster display. Continue to hold
down until ZONE disappears and CAL is displayed (approximately eight
seconds) and release.
4. Drive the vehicle slowly (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until
CAL indicator turns off (4–5 complete circles).
5. The compass is now calibrated.
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status preceded
by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential
vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long
indicator chime.
19
Instrumentation
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer/Compass
• Trip odometer/Odometer/Compass
• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time
• Distance to Empty
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in this chapter.
Compass display
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
20
Instrumentation
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Turn ignition to the ON position.
2. Start the engine.
3. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
4. From Info menu, select the
Compass/Odometer function. (Do
not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The
top of the message center must be
blank).
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
5. Press and hold the RESET and
SETUP control until the message
center display changes to show the
current zone setting.
6. Release the RESET AND SETUP
control, then slowly press RESET
down again.
7. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center.
To exit the zone setting mode press and release the RESET control.
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
21
Instrumentation
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE indicator changes to
CALIBRATION COMPLETED. This
will take up to three circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in liters/100 km or
miles/U.S. gallon.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled (miles
traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than displayed for
the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 liter (gallon)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 8 km (5 miles) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
Average fuel economy for FFV-equipped vehicles
Upon refueling, your vehicle must determine the percentage of Ethanol
in the fuel. For the first several minutes, or few miles of driving, the
message CALCULATING FUEL will appear in the message center. The
correct fuel economy will appear within approximately five miles of
driving.
22
Instrumentation
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu will give you an
estimate of how far you can drive
with the fuel remaining in your tank
under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling your vehicle.
Otherwise, the display will not show the addition of fuel for a few
kilometers (miles).
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for 1
second when you have low fuel level indicated on the fuel gauge.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• Autolock
• Easy Entry/Exit
• Autolamp Delay
• Language
• Units (English/Metric)
• System Check
• Oil Change
23
Instrumentation
Autolocks
1. Select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolocks ON or OFF.
Easy entry/exit
1. Select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit feature ON or
OFF. For more information refer to Memory Seat in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter.
Autolamp delay
1. Select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to select
the autolamp delay time.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control to set the language choice.
24
Instrumentation
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for three seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. FUEL LEVEL
2. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
3. OIL LIFE IN XX%
4. ENGINE TEMP
5. OIL PRESSURE
6. TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM (if equipped)
7. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
8. CHARGING SYSTEM
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for several
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
25
Instrumentation
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will reappear on the display every minute from the reset.
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warning display
Warning-tire very low (if
equipped)
Check engine temperature
Transmission overheated
Check transmission
Low fuel level
Check fuel cap
Check charging system
Low brake fluid level
Low oil pressure
Check tire pressure (if
equipped)
Check spare tire pressure (if
equipped)
Tire pressure system fault (if
equipped)
Tire pressure sensor fault (if
equipped)
Check AdvanceTracy (if
equipped)
Advtrac off t/c on (if equipped)
Low washer fluid level
Door ajar
Change oil soon
Oil change required
26
Status
Warning returns every minute
Warning returns after 10 minutes
Warning returns after the ignition key
is turned from OFF to ON.
Instrumentation
CHECK ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine
coolant is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn
off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and care chapter. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as soon as
possible.
TRANSMISSION OVERHEATED. Indicates the transmission is
overheating. This warning may appear when towing heavy loads or when
driving in a low gear at a high speed for an extended period of time.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine and let it
cool. Refer to Transmission fluid in the Maintenance and care
chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
dealer for transmission service as soon as possible.
CHECK TRANSMISSION. Indicates the transmission is not operating
properly. If this warning stays on, contact your dealer as soon as
possible.
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and care chapter.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM. Displayed when the electrical system is
not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical accessories
when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of the
electrical loads as possible. If the warning stays on or comes on when the
engine is operating at normal speeds, have the electrical system checked
as soon as possible.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Checking
and adding brake fluid in the Maintenance and care chapter.
LOW OIL PRESSURE. Displayed when the engine oil level is low. If
this warning message is displayed, check the level of the engine oil.
Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and care chapter for
information about adding engine oil.
WARNING-TIRE VERY LOW (if equipped). Displayed when one or
more tires have very low pressure. When this warning message is
displayed, a warning chime will sound reminding you to stop the vehicle
as soon as safely possible and check your tires for proper pressure, leaks
and damage. Refer to Servicing your tires in the Maintenance and
care chapter.
27
Instrumentation
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). Displayed when any of the
tire pressures are high or low. Refer to Checking the tire pressure in
the Maintenance and care chapter.
CHECK SPARE TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). Displayed when the
spare tire pressure is high or low. Refer to Checking the tire pressure in
the Maintenance and care chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped). Displayed when
the Tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked by your
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT (if equipped). Displayed when a
Tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system checked by your dealer.
LOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is
less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and care chapter.
CHECK ADVANCETRACy (if equipped). Displayed when the
AdvanceTracy system is not operating properly. If this message is
displayed on the message center the AdvanceTracy system will be
partially operable. If this warning stays on while the engine is running,
contact your dealer for service as soon as possible. For further
information, refer to AdvanceTracy stability enhancement system in
the Driving chapter.
ADVTRAC OFF T/C ON. Displayed on 4x4 vehicles only when 4x4 Low
Range is selected. In this mode, the stability enhancement portion of the
AdvanceTracy is disabled, but the traction enhancement feature remains
enabled. For further information, refer to AdvanceTracy stability
enhancement system in the Driving chapter.
DOOR AJAR. Displayed when a door or liftgate is not completely
closed.
CHANGE OIL SOON/OIL CHANGE REQUIRED. Displayed when the
engine oil life remaining is 5 percent or less. When oil life left is between
5% and 0%, the CHANGE OIL SOON message will be displayed. When oil
life left reaches 0%, the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be
displayed.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center.
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
28
Instrumentation
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
[approximately 8,000 km (5,000 miles) or 180 days] perform the
following:
1. Press the SETUP control to
access the System Check function.
2. Press and release the RESET
control to display “OIL LIFE XX%
HOLD RESET NEW”.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds to display “IF
NEW OIL HOLD RESET”.
4. Press and hold the RESET
control to display OIL LIFE SET TO
100%. Your oil life is now reset.
To reset the oil monitoring system to your personalized oil life %:
1. Press the SETUP control to
access the System Check function.
2. Press and release the RESET
control to display “OIL LIFE XX%
HOLD RESET NEW”.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control for 2 seconds to display “IF
NEW OIL HOLD RESET”.
29
Instrumentation
4. Release the RESET control
momentarily, then press RESET and
SETUP controls at the same time to
activate a service mode which will
display OIL LIFE XX% RESET TO
ALTER.
5. Press RESET until you find your personalized OIL LIFE XX%.
6. With your personalized OIL LIFE XX% displayed, press SETUP to
continue the system check.
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM OFF (if equipped). Displayed when the
tire pressure monitoring system is turned off. Only your dealer can turn
the system on or off. It is recommended that the tire pressure
monitoring system is always turned ON.
DATA ERR. These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle
network communication between electronic modules.
• Fuel computer
• Oil life
• Charging system
• Door sensor
• Washer fluid
• Brake fluid
• Compass
• Outside temperature
• Engine sensor
Contact your dealer as soon as possible if these messages occur on a
regular basis.
30
Controls and features
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control
clockwise to the first position to
turn on the parking lamps. Rotate
clockwise to the second position to
also turn on the headlamps.
A
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
,
and
control is in the
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp indicator light
ignition is in the Run position.
A
will illuminate if the
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position
• the parking brake must be disengaged.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light (DRL) System
does not activate your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
31
Controls and features
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel during headlamp
parklamp operation.
• Rotate up to brighten.
• Rotate down to dim.
• Rotate to full up position (past
detent/dome defeat) to turn on
interior lamps.
A
• Rotate to full down position (past detent/dome defeat) to turn off the
interior lamps, approach lamps, and will also disable the illuminated
entry feature.
32
Controls and features
AUTOLAMP CONTROL
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds or a programmed time
delay after the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to the OFF
psoition.
A
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P(Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum
travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on pedals
or while the vehicle is moving.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when R (Reverse) is selected. The RSS
will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while:
• the vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 5 km/h
(3 mph) or less.
• the vehicle is in R (Reverse) but not moving backward (the brake
pedal is depressed or the parking brake is applied), and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 5 km/h
(3 mph) or less.
33
Controls and features
• the vehicle is moving in reverse at a speed of less than 5 km/h
(3 mph) and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at
a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph)
The RSS is not effective at speeds greater than 5 km/h (3 mph) and may
not detect certain angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
34
Controls and features
The RSS detects obstacles within
approximately 1.8 meters (5.9 ft.) of
the rear bumper with a decreased
coverage area at the outer corners
of the bumper, (refer to the figures
for approximate zone coverage
areas). As you move closer to the
obstacle, the rate of the tone
increases. When the distance to the
obstacle is less than 25.0 cm
(10 in.), the tone will sound
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side
of the vehicle, the tone will sound
for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS is automatically enabled
when the gear selector is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
The RSS control allows the driver to
disable the RSS only when the
ignition is ON, and the gear selector
is in R (Reverse).
The OFF indicator remains
illuminated when the system is
disabled. The system defaults to ON every time R (Reverse) is selected.
Press the control to disable or enable the system.
The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the RSS.
Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). These elements may cause the
system to operate inaccurately.
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
35
Controls and features
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
Manual heating and air conditioning system (if equipped)
1
2
3
MAX
A/C
4
A/C
Fan speed control
Controls the volume of air circulated
in the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
Temperature control knob
Controls the temperature of the
airflow inside the vehicle.
Mode selector control
Controls the direction of the airflow
to the inside of the vehicle.
MAX
A/C
The air conditioning can operate in all modes. However, the air
conditioning will only function if the outside temperature is about 6°C
(43°F) or higher.
36
Controls and features
Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air
during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under
the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you
have stopped the vehicle.
• MAX A/C-Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. MAX A/C is noisier
than A/C but more economical and will cool the inside of the vehicle
faster. Airflow will be restricted to instrument panel registers. This
mode can also be used to prevent undesirable odors from entering the
vehicle. When placed in MAX A/C, the A/C indicator will be
illuminated and cannot be manually disabled.
•
(Panel)-Distributes outside air through the instrument panel
registers. Heating and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this
mode. Push the A/C control in order to cool the vehicle below the
outside temperature. For added customer comfort, the system will
allow some airflow through the floor ducts in this mode.
• OFF (0)-Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short
periods of time only, use this mode to prevent undesirable odors from
entering the vehicle.
•
(Panel and floor)-Distributes outside air through the instrument
panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning
capabilities are provided in this mode. Push the A/C control in order
to cool the vehicle below the outside temperature. For added
customer comfort, when the temperature control knob is anywhere in
between the full hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through
the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the
instrument panel registers.
•
(Floor)-Distributes outside air through the floor ducts. Heating
and air conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. Push the
A/C control in order to cool the vehicle below the outside
temperature.
•
(Floor and defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air conditioning
capabilities are provided in this mode. For added customer comfort,
when the temperature control knob is anywhere in between the full
hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through the floor ducts
will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defrost
ducts. If the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air
conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging.
(Note that the A/C indicator does not illuminate when this mode is
selected.)
37
Controls and features
•
(Defrost)-Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield. If the
outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air conditioner
will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. (Note that the
A/C indicator does not illuminate when this mode is selected.) For
added customer comfort, the system will allow some airflow through
the floor ducts in this mode.
Cooling your vehicle with outside air
Cooling your vehicle with air conditioned outside air is quieter but less
economical than using recirculated air. It also has less cooling capacity.
In order to cool your vehicle using outside air:
1. Turn the mode selector to
2. Press
A/C
,
or
.
. (The indicator light will illuminate.)
3. Turn the temperature control knob to the left.
4. Turn the fan speed control to the position of your choice.
During periods of high humidity, vapor may be emitted from the air
outlets when using the A/C system with outside air. This can be
corrected by using MAX A/C to cool the vehicle.
A/C
• A/C control
This control is used to manually enable or disable the operation of the
,
and MAX A/C.
air conditioning in all modes except
When manual A/C is selected (ON) the indicator will be lit. When manual
A/C is selected (OFF) the indicator will not be lit.
In
and
, if the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or
higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce
fogging. However, the A/C indicator will not illuminate.
When placed in MAX A/C, the A/C indicator will illuminate automatically
and cannot be manually disabled.
• Defrost control
Refer to Rear window defroster.
38
Controls and features
Operating tips
• In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in
before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. Once the
windshield has been cleared, operate the climate control system as
desired.
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF or
MAX A/C position.
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF
position.
• Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control
system should be left in any position other than MAX A/C or OFF
when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe”
through the outside air inlet duct.
• Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate
control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is
parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from
contamination of outside pollutants.
• If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm
weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in
cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the
windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the
vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate
control system as desired.
• Do not place objects under the front seat that will interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can
block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield.
Avoid placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These
objects may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in
addition to damaging the climate control system.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions:
1. Select
2. Set the temperature control to full heat
3. Select
A/C
39
Controls and features
4. Set the fan speed to High
5. Direct the outer panel vents towards the side windows
6. To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel
vents.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
Dual Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (DEATC) system
(if equipped)
EXT
A/C
F
F C
AUTO
OFF
F
DUAL
R
The Dual Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (DEATC) system
will maintain a selected temperature and automatically control air flow.
You can override the automatic operation with any of the override
controls.
The dual temperature zone feature allows the driver and front passenger
to set their own independent temperature set points for individual
comfort. The system uses common controls for air distribution and fan
speed for both driver and passenger.
40
Controls and features
Turning the DEATC system on
EXT
A/C
F
F
F C
AUTO
DUAL
R
OFF
Press AUTO, any of the override controls, the fan speed control, or
either of the temperature selection controls. The DEATC system will
only operate when the ignition is in the ON position.
Turning the DEATC system off
Press OFF. The outside temperature
(EXT) function (if selected) will
continue to operate until the
ignition is turned off.
EXT
FC
AUTO
OFF
41
Controls and features
DEATC automatic operation
Press AUTO and select the desired
EXT
temperature. The selected
temperature will appear in the
FC
display window, and an indicator
above the AUTO control will light.
The DEATC system will either heat
or cool the vehicle to achieve the
AUTO
OFF
selected temperature. The system
will automatically determine the fan
speed, airflow location and whether outside or recirculated air is
required.
F
When in AUTO mode and the weather is cool, the DEATC directs the
majority of the airflow to the floor area. The system will allow some
airflow out the windshield defroster ducts and the demister outlets to
reduce window fogging. Additionally, if the engine is not warm enough to
provide heat, the fan will operate at a low speed and the airflow will be
directed to the windshield or to the floor. The fan speed will start to
increase and the airflow location will change to the floor area.
If unusual conditions exist (window fogging, etc.), the manual override
controls allow you to select airflow locations as necessary. To return to
full automatic control, press the AUTO control.
42
Controls and features
Single/dual electronic temperature zone
EXT
A/C
F
F
F C
AUTO
DUAL
R
OFF
Press DUAL to enable or disable the dual zone temperature feature.
When DUAL is pressed, the display window indicates the current
temperature setting for the driver and the last temperature setting that
was selected for the passenger. In addition to the DUAL control, the
passenger may engage the dual temperature zone feature by pressing the
passenger side temperature control.
The DUAL indicator will be lit when the dual temperature zone feature is
selected.
Driver side temperature selection
EXT
A/C
F
F C
AUTO
OFF
F
DUAL
R
The display window indicates the selected temperature and manual
control of fan speed (
) if automatic fan speed is not desired.
To control the temperature, select any temperature between 16°C (60°F)
and 32°C (90°F) by pressing the temperature control on the driver side
of the system.
43
Controls and features
Passenger side temperature selection
To control the temperature, select
any temperature between 16°C
(60°F) and 32°C (90°F) by pressing
the temperature control on the
passenger side of the system.
A/C
F
DUAL
R
Temperature conversion
Press the Fahrenheit/Celsius (°F °C)
EXT
control to switch between
Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature
FC
on the DEATC display only. The
temperature in Celsius will be
displayed in half-degree increments.
The English/Metric control on the
AUTO
OFF
trip computer and message center
(if equipped) will not change the
DEATC temperature display. Refer to Message Center in the
Instrumentation chapter.
44
C
,
Controls and features
Fan speed (
)
EXT
A/C
F
F
F C
AUTO
DUAL
R
OFF
When AUTO is pressed, fan speed is adjusted automatically for existing
conditions. You can override fan speed at any time. To control fan speed
manually, press the fan control to cancel the automatic fan speed
operation. Press the control up for higher fan speed or down for lower
fan speed. The display will show
and a bar graph to indicate manual
fan operation and relative speed.
When the fan is adjusted in the AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator will
remain lit and the system will remain in auto operation.
To return to automatic fan operation, press AUTO. The fan icon and bars
will disappear from the display, and the DEATC system will return to full
automatic operation.
EXT
A/C
F
F C
AUTO
OFF
F
DUAL
R
• A/C control
(air conditioning) — Used to manually enable or disable the
and
. In
operation of the air conditioning in all modes except
all modes, the air conditioning will only function if the outside
temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher. When manual A/C is selected
(ON) the indicator will be lit. When manual A/C is selected (OFF) the
indicator will not be lit.
A/C
45
Controls and features
In
and
, if the outside temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or
higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce
fogging. However, the A/C indicator will be off and the A/C override
control cannot be selected.
The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except OFF.
However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside
temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher.
Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air
during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under
the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you
have stopped the vehicle.
When AUTO is selected, the A/C operates automatically for existing
conditions. However, the A/C indicator will not be lit. If A/C is selected
when in AUTO operation, the DEATC system will be disabled and you
will return to manual operation with the A/C indicator lit.
To return to automatic A/C operation, press AUTO.
EXT
A/C
F
F C
AUTO
OFF
F
DUAL
R
• Recirculation control
(air recirculation) — Used to manually enable or disable
and
. The use of
recirculated air operation in all modes except
recirculated air when the air conditioning is operating helps to reduce
the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle in very hot
conditions. Recirculated air may also help to keep undesired outside
odors from reaching the vehicle interior. It is recommended to allow the
DEATC system to automatically control the selection of outside or
recirculated air.
or
, as interior
The recirculation control cannot be selected in
fogging may occur.
When AUTO is selected, the recirculated air feature operates
automatically for existing conditions. However, the air recirculation
46
Controls and features
indicator will not be lit. If the recirculated air is selected while in AUTO
operation, the DEATC system will be disabled and you will return to
manual operation with the recirculated air indicator lit and with the A/C
operating.
To return to automatic recirculated air operation, press AUTO.
Do not leave the DEATC system in recirculated air operation for
extended periods of time while the system is in a heating mode or in
cold/damp conditions as this may cause interior fogging of the front, side
and rear windows.
Manual override controls
EXT
A/C
F
FC
AUTO
OFF
F
DUAL
R
The manual override controls allow you to manually determine where
airflow is directed. To return to fully automatic control, press AUTO.
When a manual airflow override control is selected, the DEATC system
will turn off the AUTO indicator and display the indicators of all
operating override controls. More than one override control indicator
may turn on when an override control is selected.
• Airflow direction control
(panel) — Distributes air through the instrument panel registers.
(panel/floor) — Distributes air through the instrument panel
registers and the front seat floor ducts. For added customer comfort, the
air distributed through the floor ducts may be slightly warmer than the
air sent to the instrument panel registers.
(floor) — Distributes air through the front seat floor ducts. The
system will allow some airflow out the window defroster ducts and the
demister outlets.
(floor/defrost) — Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster ducts, the demister outlets and the front and rear seat floor
47
Controls and features
ducts. If the temperature is about 6°C (43°F) or higher, the air
conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging.
(Note that the A/C indicator does not illuminate when this mode is
selected.) Recirculation and A/C override controls cannot be selected.
For added customer comfort, the air distributed through the floor ducts
may be slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defroster
ducts.
(defrost) — Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster ducts and the demister outlets. It can be used to clear ice or
fog from the windshield. If the outside air temperature is about 6°C
(43°F) or higher, the air conditioner will automatically dehumidify the air
to reduce fogging. (Note that the A/C indicator does not illuminate when
this mode is selected.) Recirculation and A/C override controls cannot be
selected. For added customer comfort, the system will allow some airflow
through the floor ducts in this mode.
• Turn DEATC off
OFF-Outside air is shut out. The fan, heating and air conditioning will
not operate. The outside temperature will still display when selected
with the ignition in the ON position.
R
(rear window defroster) — Refer to Rear window defroster.
Displaying outside temperature
EXT
EXT TEMP
F
F C
AUTO
OFF
A/C
DUAL
R
Press EXT to display the outside air temperature. It will remain selected
until the EXT control is pressed again.
If the driver or passenger temperature or the fan speed is changed, or
modes are selected while the outside temperature is
the AUTO or
displayed, the driver and passenger temperature display will be displayed
for 4 seconds. Following this, the outside temperature display will return
to the window.
48
Controls and features
If the outside temperature is displayed while the DEATC system is in the
OFF mode and the DEATC is turned on, the driver and passenger
temperatures will be displayed for 4 seconds. Following this, the outside
temperature display will return to the window.
The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is
moving. Higher readings may be obtained when the vehicle is not
moving. The readings that you get may not agree with temperatures
given on the radio due to differences in vehicle and station locations.
Operating tips
• In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in
or R
before driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield.
Once the windshield has been cleared, operate the climate control
system as desired.
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF
.
position or
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF
position.
• Under normal weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate control
system should be left in any position other than OFF or
when
the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the
outside air inlet duct.
• Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicle’s climate
control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is
parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from
contamination of outside pollutants.
• If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm
weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in
cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the
windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the
vehicle. Once the vehicle has been “aired out”, operate the climate
control system as desired.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can
block airflow and reduce your ability to see through your windshield.
Avoid placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These
49
Controls and features
objects may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in
addition to damaging the climate control system.
To aide in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select
Set the temperature control to full heat
Select A/C
Set the fan speed to High
Direct the outer panel vents towards the side windows
In order to increase the airflow to the outer panel vents, close the
central panel vents.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
Auxiliary climate controls (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary climate controls which are
located in the overhead console of the first row and in the headliner for
second row seating. The auxiliary climate control feature provides
increased capacity to quickly heat or cool your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual heating and air conditioning
system, the auxiliary climate controls are dependent on the main climate
control system. If the main climate control system is in the OFF position,
the auxiliary climate controls will not work.
If your vehicle is equipped with a DEATC system, the auxiliary climate
controls are independent of the main climate control system. If the main
climate control system is in the OFF position, the auxiliary climate
controls will still work. However, the A/C function will not operate unless
the A/C control has been selected on the main climate control system.
Front auxiliary control
For the rear auxiliary climate
controls to function, the front
auxiliary climate control must be set
to REAR.
50
0
REAR
2
3
4
Controls and features
To control the auxiliary climate
control system from the front
controls, turn the fan speed control
knob to the desired speed.
Turn the temperature control to
regulate the air temperature.
Press the mode selector once to
select air distribution through the
icon will
overhead vents. The
illuminate on the temperature
selector.
Press the mode selector again to select air distribution through the floor
icon will illuminate on the temperature selector. Only the
vents. The
auxiliary control head (front or rear) that is active will have the indicator
lights functioning.
Rear auxiliary climate controls (if equipped)
The rear auxiliary climate controls
0
are located in the headliner of the
second row seating.
1
2
3
4
51
Controls and features
Ensure that the front auxiliary
control is turned to REAR to enable
the rear climate controls.
Turn the fan speed control to the
desired fan speed.
Turn the temperature control to
regulate the air temperature.
Press the mode selector once to
select air distribution through the
icon will
overhead vents. The
illuminate on the temperature
selector.
Press the mode selector again to select air distribution through the floor
icon will illuminate on the temperature selector. Only the
vents. The
auxiliary control head (front or rear) that is active will have the indicator
lights functioning.
52
Controls and features
Floor console climate controls (if equipped)
Depending on the equipment package, your vehicle may be equipped
with floor console climate control capabilities.
The floor console climate control system allows the rear passengers to
select a mode of airflow distribution through the floor console. However,
air temperature and fan speed are controlled by the main climate control
system.
Mode selector control
Controls the direction of the airflow
to the rear of the vehicle.
To select air flow from the panel registers of the console, slide the
. To select airflow from the registers of the floor console,
control to
slide the control to
.
To stop the air from flowing through the floor console:
.
1. slide the mode selector control to
2. manually close the registers (rotate down).
53
Controls and features
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located
on the instrument panel.
Press the rear defroster control to
clear the rear window of thin ice
and fog.
• A small LED will illuminate when
the rear defroster is activated.
R
The ignition must be in the ON position to operate the rear window
defroster.
The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the
ignition is turned to the OFF position. To manually turn off the defroster
before 10 minutes have passed, push the control again.
4WD CONTROL
This control operates the 4WD.
Refer to the Driving chapter for
more information.
54
Controls and features
USING YOUR AUDIO SYSTEM
AM/FM stereo cassette
VOL - PUSH ON
AM
FM1
BASS
CLK
ST
TREB
BAL
FADE
FM
SEEK
SCAN
SIDE
REW
EJ
TUNE
1
2
3
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off.
Turn the control to raise or lower
volume.
4
5
TAPE
AMS
1-2
FF
6
VOL - PUSH ON
VOL - PUSH ON
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
55
Controls and features
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio and tape modes.
AM
FM
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
AM control to select from AM selections, and press the FM control to
select from FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in tape mode
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play.
Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
• Press
to move to the next
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the
control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
• Press
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.
Seek function
The seek function control works in radio mode.
Seek function in radio mode
• Press
to find the next
listenable station down the
frequency band.
• Press
to find the next
listenable station up the
frequency band.
56
Controls and features
Scan function
The scan function works in radio
mode.
SCAN
Scan function in radio mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan
mode.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with the AM or the FM select control.
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more
information on selecting a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns,
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
BASS
57
Controls and features
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s treble output.
TREB
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left
speakers.
BAL
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
FADE
Tape select
• To enter tape mode while in radio
mode, press the TAPE AMS
control.
CLK
TAPE
AMS
58
Controls and features
Automatic Music Search
The Automatic Music Search feature
allows you to quickly locate the
beginning of the tape selection
CLK
being played or to skip to the next
selection.
TAPE
To activate the feature, momentarily
AMS
depress the TAPE AMS button.
Then, press either REW (for the
beginning of the current selection) or FF (to advance to the next
selection). The tape deck stops and returns to play mode when the AMS
circuit senses a blank section on the tape.
In order to ensure proper operation of the AMS feature, the tape MUST
have a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs.
Rewind
The rewind control works in tape
mode.
To rewind in tape mode, press the
REW control.
Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
tape mode.
To fast forward in tape mode, press
the FF control.
SIDE
REW
1-2
FF
SIDE
REW
1-2
FF
In the tape mode, tape direction will automatically reverse when the end
of the tape is reached.
Tape direction select
Press SIDE and 1–2 at the same
time to play the alternate side of a
tape.
SIDE
REW
1-2
FF
59
Controls and features
Eject function
Press the control to stop and eject a
tape.
DolbyT noise reduction
Dolbyt noise reduction operates
only in tape mode. Dolbyt noise
reduction reduces the amount of
hiss and static during tape playback.
Press the
reduction.
EJ
4
control to activate (and deactivate) Dolbyt noise
Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D symbol
are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Setting the clock
Press CLK to toggle between
listening frequencies and clock
mode while in radio mode.
To set the hour, press and hold the
CLK control and press the SEEK
control:
•
to decrease hours and
•
to increase hours.
CLK
TAPE
AMS
SEEK
TUNE
DISCS
To set the minute, press and hold
the CLK control and press the
TUNE control:
CLK
TAPE
AMS
60
Controls and features
•
to decrease minutes and
•
to increase minutes.
SEEK
TUNE
DISCS
The CLK control will allow you to switch between media display mode
(radio station, stereo information, etc.) and clock display mode (time).
When in clock mode, the media information will display for 10 seconds,
when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Any
time that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media
information will again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the
clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed.
AM/FM Stereo / Single CD Radio
VOL - PUSH ON
AM
FM
SCN
ST
FM1
BASS
TREB
BAL
FADE
CD
CLK
DISC
SEEK
EJ
TUNE
COMP
DISCS
CD
1
CD
2
SHUFFLE
3
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off.
4
5
6
VOL - PUSH ON
61
Controls and features
Turn the control to raise or lower
volume.
VOL - PUSH ON
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio and CD modes.
AM
FM
CD
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
• Press
to move to the next
SEEK
frequency down the band
TUNE
DISCS
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the
control to move through the frequencies quickly.
• Press
to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.
Seek function
The seek function control works in radio or CD mode.
62
Controls and features
Seek function in radio mode
• Press
to find the next
listenable station down the
frequency band.
SEEK
TUNE
DISCS
• Press
to find the next
listenable station up the frequency band.
Seek function in CD mode
• Press
to listen to the next
selection.
to listen to the previous
• Press
selection.
Scan function
The scan function works in radio or
CD mode.
SEEK
TUNE
DISCS
SCN
Scan function in radio mode
Press SCN to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations on the
frequency band. Press SCN again to stop the scan mode.
Scan function in CD mode
Press SCN to hear a short sampling of all selections on the CD. (The CD
scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first track at the end
of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again.
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
BASS
63
Controls and features
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s treble output.
TREB
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left
speakers.
BAL
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
FADE
CD select
• To begin CD play (if CD[s] are
loaded), press the CD control.
The first track of the disc will
begin playing. After that, CD play
will begin where it stopped last.
64
AM
FM
CD
Controls and features
Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or
discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may
occur.
Rewind
The rewind control works in CD mode.
To rewind in CD mode, press the
CD control (preset 1).
Press the control again to deactivate
rewind mode.
CD
1
Fast forward
The fast forward control works in CD mode.
To fast forward in CD changer
mode, press the CD control (preset
2).
Press the control again to deactivate
fast forward mode.
Eject function
Press the control to stop and eject a
CD.
Compression feature
Compression adjust brings soft and
loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
CD
2
EJ
COMP
Press the COMP control to activate and deactivate compression adjust.
Shuffle feature
The shuffle feature operates in CD
SHUFFLE
mode and plays all tracks on the
6
current disc in random order.
Press the SHUFFLE control to start
this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control
is pressed again.
65
Controls and features
Setting the clock
Press CLK to toggle between
listening frequencies and clock
mode while in radio mode.
To set the hour, press and hold the
CLK control.
SCN
CLK
Press the SEEK control:
•
to decrease hours and
•
to increase hours.
SEEK
TUNE
DISCS
To set the minute, press and hold
the CLK control.
SCN
CLK
Press the TUNE control:
•
to decrease minutes and
•
to increase minutes.
66
SEEK
TUNE
DISCS
Controls and features
Premium AM/FM Stereo/Cassette/Single CD
DISC
VOL PUSH ON
EJ
FM 1
AMC
BL
AM
ST
MUTE
RF
FM
EJ
DOLBY B NR
TAPE
CD
AUTO
SEEK
TUNE
SCAN
BASS
TREB
REW
FF
SIDE 1-2
1
2
3
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off.
Audio power can also be turned on
by pressing the AM/FM select
control or the TAPE/CD select
control.
SEL
4
BAL
CLK
FADE
COMP
SHUFFLE
5
6
VOL - PUSH ON
Turn control to raise or lower
volume.
VOL - PUSH ON
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
67
Controls and features
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio, tape and CD modes.
AM
FM
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in tape mode
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
• Press
to move to the next
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
• Press
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.
Seek function
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode.
Seek function in radio mode
• Press
to find the next
listenable station down the
frequency band.
• Press
to find the next listenable station up the frequency band.
Seek function in tape mode
• Press
to listen to the previous selection on the tape.
• Press
to listen to the next selection on the tape.
68
Controls and features
Seek function in CD mode
• Press
to seek to the previous
track of the disc. If a selection
has been playing for three
seconds or more and you press
, the CD will replay that selection
from the beginning.
• Press
to seek forward to the next track of the disc. After the last
track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will
automatically replay.
Scan function
The scan function works in radio,
tape or CD mode.
SCAN
Scan function in radio mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode.
Scan function in tape mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s
first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the
tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again.
Scan function in CD mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the
control again.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with
AM
FM
the AM/FM select control.
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune
adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station.
69
Controls and features
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns,
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected.
REW
FF
SIDE 1-2
1
2
3
4
COMP
SHUFFLE
5
6
Autoset memory preset
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips
when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autoset memory preset
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls.
2. Press the control.
3. When the first six strong stations
AUTO
are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start
playing.
CLK
If there are less than six strong
stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset
controls will all store the last strong station available.
These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls
(until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner as your original
presets.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set
memory stations, press the AUTO control again.
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
70
BASS
TREB
Controls and features
Press the BASS control then press:
•
to decrease the bass output
SEL
and
•
to increase the bass output.
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s treble output.
Press the TREB control then press:
•
to decrease the treble output
and
•
BASS
TREB
SEL
to increase the treble output.
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left
speakers.
BAL
FADE
Press the BAL control then press:
•
to shift sound to the left and
•
to shift sound to the right.
SEL
71
Controls and features
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
Press the FADE control then press:
•
•
to shift the sound to the
front and
BAL
FADE
SEL
to shift the sound to the rear.
Tape/CD select
• To begin tape play (with a tape
loaded into the audio system)
TAPE
CD
while in the radio or CD mode,
press the TAPE control. Press
again during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast forward
function.
• To begin CD play (if CD(s) are
loaded), press the CD control.
TAPE
CD
The first track of the disc will
begin playing. If returning from
radio or tape mode, CD play will begin where it stopped last.
Press the CD control to toggle between single CD and CD changer play
(if equipped).
Do not insert any promotional (odd shaped or sized) discs, or
discs with removable labels into the CD player as jamming may
occur.
Rewind
The rewind control works in tape
REW
and CD modes.
1
• In tape mode, radio play will
continue until rewind is stopped
(with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached.
• In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the
current track.
72
Controls and features
Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
tape and CD modes.
• In the tape mode, tape direction
will automatically reverse when
the end of the tape is reached.
FF
2
• In CD mode, pressing the control fast forwards the CD within the
current track.
Tape direction select
Press SIDE 1–2 to play the alternate
side of a tape.
Eject function
Press the EJ control to stop and
eject a tape.
SIDE 1-2
3
EJ
Press the EJ control to stop and
eject a CD.
EJ
DolbyT noise reduction
Dolbyt noise reduction operates in
tape mode. Dolbyt noise reduction
reduces the amount of hiss and
static during tape playback.
Press the
reduction.
4
control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolbyt noise
Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolbyt” and the double-D
are registered trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing
symbol
Corporation.
73
Controls and features
Compression adjust
Compression adjust brings soft and
loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
Press the COMP control to activate
and deactivate compression adjust.
COMP
5
Shuffle feature
The shuffle feature operates in CD
SHUFFLE
mode and plays all tracks in random
6
order.
Press the SHUFFLE control to start
this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control
is pressed again.
Setting the clock
To set the hour, press and hold the
CLK control and press SEEK:
AUTO
CLK
•
to decrease hours and
•
to increase hours.
To set the minute, press and hold
the CLK control and press TUNE:
AUTO
CLK
74
Controls and features
•
to decrease minutes and
•
to increase minutes.
If your vehicle has a separate clock,
(other than the digital radio
display), the CLK control will not
function in the above manner.
The CLK control will allow you to
switch between media display mode
AUTO
(radio station, stereo information,
etc.) and clock display mode (time).
When in clock mode, the media
information will display for 10
CLK
seconds, when the radio is turned
on, and then revert to clock
information. Any time that the
media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will
again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media
mode, the media information will always be displayed.
Mute mode
Press the MUTE control to mute the
playing media. Press the MUTE
control again to return to the
playing media.
EJ
MUTE
75
Controls and features
Audiophile AM/FM Stereo In Dash Six CD Radio
Premium AM/FM Stereo In Dash Six CD Radio
SHUF
DISC
TUNE
SCAN
SEEK
REW
FF
COMP
MUTE
EJ
LOAD
BASS
BAL
SEL
TREB
FADE
PUSH ON
AM
FM
76
CD
1
2
3
4
5
6
MENU
Controls and features
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off. Turn the control to
raise or lower volume.
PUSH ON
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
Speed sensitive volume
With this feature, radio volume changes automatically and slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1
through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
To engage the speed sensitive
volume feature, press and hold the
volume control for five seconds
PUSH ON
(with the radio on), then press:
•
to increase volume
compensation.
•
to decrease or shut off the
volume compensation.
The selected level will appear in the
display.
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio and CD modes.
SEL
AM
FM
CD
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
77
Controls and features
Tune/disc adjust
The tune control works in radio or CD mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
• Press
to move to the next
DISC
TUNE
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
• Press
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.
Disc adjust for CD mode
• Press
to select the previous
DISC
TUNE
disc. (Play will begin on the first
track of the disc unless shuffle
mode is engaged.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold
the control to continue reversing through the discs.
to select the next disc. Hold the control to fast-forward
• Press
through the remaining discs.
Seek function
The seek function works in radio or CD mode.
Seek function in radio mode
• Press
to find the next
listenable station down the
frequency band. SEEK DOWN
will display.
to find the next listenable station up the frequency band.
• Press
SEEK UP will display.
78
Controls and features
Seek function in CD mode
• Press
to seek to the previous
track of the current disc. If the
beginning of the disc is reached,
the CD player seeks to the
beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing.
to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After
• Press
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc
will automatically replay.
Scan function
The scan function works in radio or
CD mode.
Scan function in radio mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan
mode.
Scan function in CD mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the
control again.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. Press the
AM/FM control to toggle between AM, FM1, or FM2.
2. Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or
down the frequency band. Press the TUNE control to go up or down the
listening band in individual increments.
3. Select a station. Refer to Seek function for more information on
selecting a station.
79
Controls and features
4. Press and hold a memory preset control. The playing media will mute
momentarily. When the sound returns, the station is held in memory on
the control you selected. The display will read SAVED.
Autostore
Autostore allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful
on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autostore
1. Press and momentarily hold the AM/FM control.
2. AUTOSET will flash in the display
as the frequency band is scrolled
through.
AM
FM
CD
3. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start playing.
If there are fewer than six strong stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong
station available.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set
memory stations, press the AM/FM control again.
80
Controls and features
CD select
CD mode may be entered by
AM
CD
pressing the CD control and the
FM
LOAD control. Load the CD into the
audio system. The first track of the
disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped
last.
If an alternative CD is desired, press the corresponding preset control
(1–6) of a loaded CD, or press the TUNE control to access the other
loaded CDs.
NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD
present in the audio system.
NO CD will illuminate in the display if the CD control and a present
number (that is currently empty) are pressed. The system will play the
next available disc.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm
(4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.
Display description
Six circles are always lit in the digital display. These signify the six CD
slots in the audio system. When a disc is loaded into a particular slot
(1–6), the number inside that specific circle lights. If the circle is empty,
there is no CD in that particular slot.
Load
The load feature allows you to load
LOAD
single CDs into the player internal
to the radio.
This six disc CD player is equipped with a CD door. Compact
discs should only be inserted into the player after the CD door
has been opened by the player. Do not attempt to force the door
open. Compact discs should only be loaded by pressing the LOAD
control.
81
Controls and features
Press the LOAD control. (You can choose which slot will be loaded by
pressing the desired preset number. If you do not choose a slot, the
system will choose the next available one.) Wait until the CD door opens.
Load the CD into the player. LOADING CD# is displayed. When the CD
has been loaded, the door will close and the CD will begin to play. For
example, to load a CD into slot 2, press the LOAD control and then press
preset 2.
Auto load
This feature allows you to autoload
up to 6 discs into the multi disc CD
player internal to the radio.
LOAD
Press and hold the LOAD control until AUTOLOAD # is displayed. The
CD door will open. Load the desired discs, one at a time. The CD is
loaded into position and the audio system will display CD#. Each time
the CD door opens, INSERT CD# is displayed. The door will close and
the player will move to the next slot after each disc has been loaded.
The process is repeated until all 6 slots are full. The audio system plays
the last CD loaded and the display is updated. If some slots are already
full and autoload is activated, the system will fill all empty slots.
Eject
Press the EJ control to stop and
EJ
eject a CD. You can choose which
CD will be ejected by pressing the
EJ control and the desired preset number (1–6). For example, to eject
CD 2, press the EJ control and then press the preset 2 control. If you do
not choose a specific CD, the player will eject the current CD.
If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the
player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when
the ignition is ON or OFF.
Auto eject
Press and momentarily hold the EJ
EJ
control to engage auto eject. All CDs
which are present in the player will
be ejected one at a time. If a CD is ejected and not removed from the
door of the CD player, the player will automatically reload the CD. This
feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF.
82
Controls and features
Rewind
The rewind control works in CD
REW
FF
modes.
Press and hold the REW control
until the desired selection is reached. If the beginning of the disc is
reached, the CD will begin play at the first track. Release the control to
disengage rewind mode.
When in rewind mode, your audio system will automatically lower the
volume level of the playing media.
Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
REW
FF
CD modes.
Press and hold the FF control until
the desired selection is reached. If the end of the disc is reached, the CD
will return to the first track. Release the control to disengage fast
forward mode.
When in fast forward mode, your audio system will automatically lower
the volume level of the playing media.
Shuffle feature
Press the SHUF control until the
desired shuffle mode is displayed.
The audio system will then engage
the desired shuffle mode.
When engaged, the shuffle feature has two different modes: SHUFFLE
DISC and SHUFFLE TRK.
SHUFFLE DISC randomly plays tracks from all the discs presently in the
audio system.
SHUFFLE TRK plays all the tracks on the current disc in random order.
Compression feature (if equipped)
The compression feature operates in
CD mode and brings soft and loud
CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
MENU
+
SEL
On Audiophile audios, press the MENU control until compression status
is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the compression feature
83
Controls and features
when COMP OFF is displayed. Press the SEL control again to disable the
feature when COMP ON is displayed.
On Premium audios, press the
COMP control until COMP ON is
displayed.
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
Press the BASS control. Use the
SEL control to increase or decrease
the amount of bass.
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s treble output.
Press the TREB control. Use the
SEL control to increase or decrease
the amount of treble.
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left
speakers.
Press the BAL control. Use the SEL
control to adjust the sound between
the left and right speakers.
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
Press the FADE control. Use the
SEL control to adjust the sound
between the front and rear speakers.
84
BASS
+
SEL
+
SEL
+
SEL
+
SEL
TREB
BASS
TREB
BAL
FADE
BAL
FADE
Controls and features
Menu mode
The MENU control allows you to
access many different features
within your audio system. There are
three sets of menus available
depending upon which mode or feature is activated.
While in FM mode, two menus are available. If RDS is turned OFF, you
can access the following:
• SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock.
• SELECT MINUTES — Refer to Setting the clock.
• RDS OFF — Refer to Radio data system feature.
If RDS is turned ON, you can access the following:
• TRAFFIC ON/OFF-Refer to Traffic announcements.
• FIND type-Refer to Program type.
• SHOW (NAME, TYPE, NONE)- Refer to Radio data system feature.
• RDS ON— Refer to Radio data system feature.
• SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock.
• SELECT MINUTES —Refer to Setting the clock.
When in CD mode, you can access: SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES
or COMP ON/OFF.
SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES— Allows you to adjust the hours
and minutes. Refer to Setting the clock.
TRAFFIC ON/OFF— Traffic announcements can be programmed as local
or distant. Refer to Traffic announcements.
RDS ON/OFF— This feature allows your audio system to receive text
information from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Refer to Radio Data
System feature.
FIND type — Allows you to select your desired FM program type and
search for that selection.
SHOW — Allows you to select from NAME (displays the name of the
radio station), TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc.), or
NONE (deactivates the RDS display).
85
Controls and features
Radio data system (RDS) feature
This feature allows your audio
system to receive text information
from RDS-equipped FM radio
stations.
To activate RDS:
MENU
+
SEL
• When in FM mode, press the MENU control until RDS OFF displays.
• Press the SEL control to engage this feature (RDS ON).
RDS features:
Once the RDS feature is on, press the MENU control to scroll through
the following selections:
Traffic announcements
This feature allows you to hear traffic announcements while in CD mode.
These announcements are broadcast by traffic capable RDS stations.
When in this mode, traffic announcements will interrupt radio and CD
play.
• Press the MENU control until TRAFFIC is displayed.
• Press the SEL control to engage the feature. The display will read
TRAFFIC ON.
This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic
announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the
volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level
will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic
announcements will be at the selected volume level.
To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON
displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF.
Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets.
Program type
This feature allows you to search for RDS stations selectively by their
program type.
86
Controls and features
Press the MENU control until FIND
program type is displayed.
MENU
+ SEL
Use the SEL control to select the
program type. With the feature on,
use the SEEK or SCAN control to
find the desired program type from the following selections:
• Classic
• Country
• Info
• Jazz
• Oldies
• R&B
• Religious
• Rock
• Soft
• Top 40
Show
This feature allows you to select the
type of RDS broadcast information
the radio will regularly show in the
display.
MENU
+
SEL
With RDS activated, press the
MENU control until SHOW is
MENU
+ SEL
displayed.
Use the SEL control to select TYPE
(displays the RDS program type:
rock, jazz, etc), NAME (displays the name of the radio station) or NONE
(deactivates the RDS display).
Digital signal processing (if equipped)
The digital signal processing (DSP) feature allows you to change the
signal mode to suit your listening tastes.
87
Controls and features
Press the DSP control to access one
of the following modes:
• DSP OFF
• SIGNAL MODE
• OCCUPANCY MODE
Use the SEL control to select the
DSP
+
SEL
SEL
desired signal mode (the selected
mode will appear in the display). The following signal modes can be
selected:
• DSP OFF—disengages the feature
• NEWS—”voice-only” type of sound with a limited audio band
• JAZZ CLUB—jazz club with clearly reflected sounds
• HALL—rectangular concert hall capacity of about 2 000
• CHURCH—church with a high vault
• STADIUM—outdoor stadium with a capacity of about 30 000
Press the DSP control again to access the occupancy modes. Use the
SEL control to optimize the sound based upon the occupants in the
vehicle. The following occupancy modes can be selected:
• ALL SEATS
• DRIVER SEAT
• REAR SEATS
Mute mode
Press the control to mute the
playing media. Press the control
again to return to the playing media.
Setting the clock
Press the MENU control until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. (The menu
mode must be engaged to enable
clock mode).
88
Controls and features
Use the SEL control to manually set
the time.
• Press
to increase
hours/minutes.
SEL
• Press
to decrease
hours/minutes.
Press the MENU control again to disengage the clock mode.
Troubleshooting the CD changer (if equipped)
The laser beam used in the compact disc player is harmful to the
eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case.
If sound skips:
• You may be traveling on a rough road, playing badly scratched discs or
the disc may be dirty. Skipping will not scratch the discs or damage
the player.
If your changer does not work, it may be that:
• A disc is already loaded where you want to insert a disc.
• The disc is inserted with the label surface downward.
• The disc is dusty or defective.
• The player’s internal temperature is above 60°C (140°F). Allow the
player to cool down before operating.
• A disc with format and dimensions not within industry standards is
inserted.
Cleaning compact discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to
the edge. Do not use circular motion.
CD and CD changer care
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
• Do not insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer
magazine.
89
Controls and features
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm
(4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.
Cleaning cassette player (if equipped)
Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to
12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation.
Cassette and cassette player care
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or
extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme
temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not
being played.
Radio frequency information
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies
AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies
are:
AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz
FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Not all frequencies are used in a given area.
Radio reception factors
Three factors can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is.
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km
90
Controls and features
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their
strength/volume relative to other stations.
• Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems.
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal.
• Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station
frequency is displayed.
The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it
will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo.
Audio system warranties and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information.
If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
91
Controls and features
POSITIONS OF THE IGNITION
1. OFF/LOCK, shuts off the engine
and all accessories/locks the steering
wheel, gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
2. ACC, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. ON, all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights
illuminated. Key position when driving.
3
2
4
1
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
SPEED CONTROL
To turn speed control on
• Press ON.
Vehicle speed cannot be controlled
until the vehicle is traveling at or
above 48 km/h (30 mph).
Do not shift the gearshift lever
into N (Neutral) with the speed
control on.
Do not use the speed
control in heavy traffic or
on roads that are winding,
slippery, or unpaved.
92
Controls and features
To turn speed control off
• Press OFF
• Speed control automatically
defaults to OFF when the ignition
is turn off.
Once speed control is switched off,
the previously programmed set
speed will be erased.
To set a speed
• Press SET+. For speed control to
operate, the speed control must
RES
be ON and the vehicle speed
must be greater than 48 km/h
(30 mph).
SET
+
If you drive up or down a steep hill,
COAST
your vehicle speed may vary
momentarily slower or faster than
the set speed. This is normal.
Speed control cannot reduce the
vehicle speed if it increases above the set speed going downhill. If your
vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while driving downhill, you
may want to shift to the next lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce
your vehicle speed.
If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set
speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal.
Pressing RES will re-engage it.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery, or unpaved.
93
Controls and features
To set a higher set speed
• Press and hold SET +. Release
the control when the desired
vehicle speed is reached or
• Press and release SET + to
operate the Tap-Up function.
Each press will increase the set
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or
• Accelerate with your accelerator
pedal. When the desired vehicle
speed is reached, press and
release SET +.
RES
SET
+
COAST
You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed
control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to
the previously programmed set speed.
To set a lower set speed
• Press and hold COAST/CST −.
Release the control when the
desired speed is reached or
• Press and release COAST/CST −
to operate the Tap-Down
function. Each press will decrease
the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) or
RES
SET
+
COAST
• Depress the brake pedal. When
the desired vehicle speed is
reached, press SET +.
RES
SET
+
COAST
94
Controls and features
To disengage speed control
• Depress the brake pedal or
• Depress the clutch pedal (if
equipped).
Disengaging the speed control will
not erase the previously
programmed set speed.
Pressing OFF will erase the
previously programmed set speed.
95
Controls and features
To return to a previously set speed
• Press RES. For RES to operate,
the vehicle speed must be faster
than 48 km/h (30 mph).
RES
SET
+
COAST
Indicator light
This light comes on when the
vehicle speed control is engaged and
actively controlling vehicle speed.
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING COLUMN (IF EQUIPPED)
Pull the lever down to unlock the
tilt/telescope steering column. While
the lever is in the down position, tilt
and telescope the steering column
to the desired orientation.
96
Controls and features
If your vehicle has the tilt-only
steering column, pull the lever down
to unlock the steering column. While
the lever is in the down position, tilt
the steering column to its desired
orientation.
Lift the lever back to its original
position to lock the steering column.
Never adjust the steering
column when the vehicle is
moving.
HAZARD FLASHER
For information on the hazard flasher control, refer to Hazard flasher in
the Roadside emergencies chapter.
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS
Rotate the windshield wiper control
to the desired interval, low or high
speed position.
The bars of varying length are for
intermittent wipers. When in this
position rotate the control upward
for fast intervals and downward for
slow intervals.
97
Controls and features
Push (tap) the end of the stalk
briefly for a single swipe (no wash).
Push and hold for three swipes with
wash. Push and hold for a longer
wash (up to ten seconds).
Speed dependent wipers
When the windshield wiper control is set on the intermittent settings,
speed-sensitive front wipers automatically adjust as the vehicle’s speed
changes.
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
INT 1 — 3–4 second interval rear
wiper.
INT 2 — 8–10 second interval rear
wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and
hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer control to either
position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
98
Controls and features
Audio control features
Press
•
•
•
•
to select:
AM, FM1, FM2,
TAPE (if equipped),
CD (if equipped), or
DVD (if equipped).
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:
• Press MEM to select preset
stations within the selected radio
band.
In Tape mode:
• Press MEM to select the next
selection on the tape.
In CD mode:
• Press MEM to select the next
selection on the CD.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or − to adjust
volume.
99
Controls and features
Climate control features
Press TMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
Press
+ or - to adjust fan speed.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
100
Controls and features
Storage compartment
Press the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped)
The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of
aftermarket garage door openers:
• Place the Velcro hook onto the
side of the aftermarket
transmitter opposite of the
button.
• Place the transmitter into storage
compartment, button down.
• Place the provided height
adaptors onto the back of the
door as needed.
• Close the door.
• Press the depression in the door
to activate the transmitter.
101
Controls and features
Moon roof (if equipped)
You can move the glass panel of the moon roof back to open or tilt up to
ventilate the vehicle.
To open the moon roof:
The moon roof is equipped with an
automatic, one-touch, express
opening feature. Press and
momentarily hold the rear portion of
the control. To stop motion at any
time during the one-touch opening,
press the control a second time.
To close the moon roof:
Press and hold the front portion of
the control until the glass panel
stops moving. Once fully closed, the rear of the glass panel will appear
higher than the front edge.
To vent:
To tilt the moon roof into the vent position (when the glass panel is
closed), press and hold the front portion of the control. To close the
moon roof from the vent position, press and hold the rear portion of the
control until the glass panel stops moving.
If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is installed,
the moon roof needs to be opened to the vent position to reset the moon
roof positions.
The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be opened or closed when
the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the
vehicle.
Do not let children play with the moon roof. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
Interior Lamps
Dome lamps and map lamps
The front map/dome lamp is located overhead between the driver and
the passenger seats. If the vehicle is equipped with a moon roof or large
overhead console, the map/dome lamp is located above the second row
seat.
102
Controls and features
The map lamp controls are located
on the dome lamp. Press the
controls on either side of each lens
on each map lamp to activate the
lamps.
All vehicles are equipped with a
cargo lamp, which is located
overhead in the rear cargo area and
above the the third row seat (if
equipped). The cargo lamp will stay
on if the control is moved to the
passenger side position. When the
control is in the middle position, the
lamp will only come on when a door is opened. If the control is moved to
the driver’s side position, the lamp will not come on at all.
With the control in the middle position, the dome lamp will illuminate
whenever a front door is opened. If either front door has been opened
from the outside, the lamp will remain on for 25 seconds after the door
is shut. If any other door has been opened from the inside, the lamp will
shut off immediately after the door is closed.
The front map lamps are located on
the control panel (if equipped).
First row map lamps may also be
located in the overhead console (if
equipped). Press the controls on
either side of each map lamp to
activate the lamps.
HOMELINKT UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver, located on the overhead console,
provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most current transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver to a
garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
103
Controls and features
Do not use the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLinkt
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLinkt equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelinkt Universal Transceiver buttons be erased for
security purposes, refer to Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program the HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver with the
vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or “ACC”) position for programming and/or operation of the
HomeLinkt. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLinkt for
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the red
light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not repeat step one to
program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLinkt buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLinkt.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 2–8 cm (1–3 inches) away from the HomeLinkt
Universal Transceiver surface (located on your overhead console) while
keeping the red light in view.
104
Controls and features
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLinkt and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
step 3 with procedures noted in the
“Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” section for Canadian
residents.
4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons
when the red light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light indicates
acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency signals.)
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button and observe the red
light. If the light is a constant red, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLinkt button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1.
If the red light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
continuous red, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLinkt button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLinkt should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLinkt buttons begin with step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
105
Controls and features
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLinkt to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace step 3 with the
following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button (note step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLinkt. The red indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLinkt accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLinkt button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the
event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
Homelinkt at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
106
Controls and features
Erasing HomeLinkT buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLinkt buttons until the red
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLinkt is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step
2 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button
To program a device to HomeLinkt using a HomeLinkt button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The red indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLinkt button, follow step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLinkt at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
AUTOMATIC DIMMING REAR VIEW MIRROR
The autolamp/automatic dimming
mirror is equipped with an
automatic dimming feature. This
feature will change from the normal
state to the non-glare “active” state
when bright lights (glare) reach the
mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from front or behind, it will
adjust automatically to minimize glare.
OFF
AUTO
The mirror will automatically return to the normal position whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) (when the mirror is in the ON position).
This helps to ensure a bright clear view in the mirror when backing up.
107
Controls and features
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
To turn on the visor mirror lamps,
lift the mirror cover.
POWER WINDOWS
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows.
• Press the top portion of the
rocker switch to close.
AUTO
• Press the bottom portion of the
rocker switch to open.
AUTO
108
Controls and features
One touch down
• Press AUTO completely down and
release quickly. The driver’s
window will open fully.
One touch down can be deactivated
during operation by pushing down
on the top part of the driver power
window control.
AUTO
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches and audio system may be
used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position or until any door is opened.
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The manual door lock knob is located above the inside door release
handle for all four doors.
• Push the knob forward to lock the door.
• Pull back on the knob to unlock the door.
109
Controls and features
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
POWER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK INHIBIT
If the interior trim switch does not
operate, see the Perimeter alarm
system in this section for more
details.
LIFTGATE
An additional power door lock can be accessed by opening the liftgate.
The button is located either on the top of the left-hand quarter trim
panel underneath the rear window, or on the bottom of the left-hand
quarter trim panel. Press this button to lock or unlock all the doors.
110
Controls and features
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside. The rear doors can be
opened from the outside when the
doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock. Move control down
to disengage childproof locks.
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS
The ignition must be in the ACC or ON position to adjust the power side
view mirrors.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
111
Controls and features
Heated outside mirrors
R
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment with
cassette/compact disc storage
• Auxiliary power point
• Cupholders
• Tissue box holder
Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you
in a collision.
112
Controls and features
Auxiliary power point
Power outlets are designed for
accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not
covered by your warranty.
The power point is an additional
power source for electrical accessories.
Rear auxiliary power point (if equipped)
A second auxiliary power point is
located on the rear side of the
console. It is accessible from the
rear seats.
Rear console features
The rear console may incorporate
the following features:
• air vents
• cupholders (will pull up with
break away feature)
• rear power point
113
Controls and features
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT
Position the driver floor mat so that
the eyelet is over the pointed end of
the retention post and rotate
forward to lock in. Make sure that
the mat does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator or the
brake pedal. To remove the floor
mat, reverse the installation
procedure.
REAR LIFTGATE
The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. You can open
and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. It cannot be opened from
inside the cargo area.
• To open the liftgate window,
press the control on the remote
entry key fob or, with the liftgate
unlocked, push the control button
on the right side under the
license plate lamp shield.
• To open the liftgate, unlock the
liftgate (with the power door
locks, the remote entry or the
keyless entry pad) and pull the
middle lever under the license
plate lamp shield.
To lock the liftgate and the liftgate window, use the power door locks or
press the door lock switch on the left side of the cargo area. To manually
lock or unlock the liftgate, move the button located below the window
down or up.
The liftgate door and window should be closed before driving. If not,
possible damage may occur to your vehicle.
Always close liftgate window before opening liftgate. Liftgate
glass and liftgate should never be open at the same time. Failure
to observe this warning may result in personal injury or damage
to your vehicle.
114
Controls and features
Make sure the liftgate door and/or window are closed to prevent
exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling out.
CARGO COVER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo area cover that covers the
luggage compartment of your vehicle.
To install the cover:
Push both ends of the cover into the
depressions (right side first) in the
trim panels behind the second row
seat.
To reduce the risk of
injuries, the cargo area
cover must be properly installed
on the rear trim panels.
Do not place any objects on the cargo area cover. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.
The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is
not securely installed.
Cargo management system
The cargo management system consists of storage compartments located
in the floor of the rear cargo area.
115
Controls and features
7 passenger stowage:
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid, lift the
release handle and press down on
the lid.
5 passenger stowage:
When the lid is open, it will stand
up on its own. The lid can be
detached from the vehicle and used
as a knee pad (carpet side up) for
changing a tire.
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid, lift the
release handle and press down on the lid.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
and liftgate and open the liftgate window without a key.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position.
The liftgate glass features operate as long as the vehicle’s speed is less
than 5 km/h (3 mph). The panic feature operates with the key in the
OFF or ACC position.
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership, to
aid in troubleshooting.
116
Controls and features
Unlocking the doors/liftgate
Press this control to unlock the
driver’s door. The interior lamps will
illuminate with the ignition OFF.
Press the control a second time
within three seconds to unlock all
doors and liftgate.
Locking the doors/liftgate
Press this control to lock all doors
and liftgate. The doors and liftgate
will lock and the lamps will flash
once as long as all doors, liftgate,
liftgate glass are closed (also
includes hood on vehicles equipped
with perimeter anti-theft). If any of
these are ajar, the lamps will not
flash.
To confirm all doors are closed and
locked, press the control a second
time within three seconds. The doors will lock again, the lamps will flash
once and the horn will chirp.
If any of the doors or liftgate are ajar, the horn will make two quick
chirps, reminding you to properly close all doors.
117
Controls and features
Opening the liftgate window
Press the control to unlatch the
liftgate window.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press this control to activate the
alarm.
The personal panic alarm will cycle
the horn and turn signals on/off,
plus illuminate the interior lights.
To deactivate the alarm, press the
control again or turn the ignition to
ACC or ON.
Memory seat feature (if equipped)
The remote entry system can also
control the memory seat feature.
Press the control once to unlock the
driver’s door. Pressing the control
will automatically move the seat to
the desired memory position (the
seat position corresponds to the
transmitter being used).
118
Controls and features
Activating the memory seat feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat to the position you desire.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press one
control on the remote transmitter
and then press the 1 or 2 control on
the driver’s door panel to which you
would like to associate with the seat
and Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
remote transmitter if desired.
SET
1
2
Deactivating the memory seat feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on
the driver’s door panel.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to
be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in
operating range can be caused by the following factors:
• Weather conditions
• Nearby radio towers
• Structures around the vehicle
• Other vehicles parked next to the vehicle
119
Controls and features
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the transmitter near the
key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE
FRONT PART OF THE
TRANSMITTER APART.
2. Place the positive (+) side of new
battery in the same orientation.
Refer to the diagram inside the
transmitter unit.
3. Snap the two halves back
together.
Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to
become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should
operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
If a remote transmitter has been lost
and you would like to remove it
from the vehicle’s memory, or you
would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them
programmed to your vehicle:
• Take all your vehicle’s
transmitters to your dealer for
programming, or
• Perform the programming
procedure yourself.
Programming remote transmitters
It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure.
120
Controls and features
To program the transmitters yourself:
• Insert a key in the ignition and
turn from 1 (LOCK) to 3 (ON)
and cycle between 1 (LOCK) and
3 (ON) eight times in rapid
succession (within 10 seconds)
with the eighth turn ending in the
3 (ON) position. The doors will
lock/unlock to confirm that
programming mode has been
entered.
3
2
4
1
• Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any
button on a transmitter. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that the
remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.)
• Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters.
The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed.
• When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn
the ignition to 1 (LOCK) or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors will
lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s).
The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when the ignition
is turned to the ON or ACC position. The dome lamp control (if
equipped) must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated entry
system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the OFF position.
121
Controls and features
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
With the keyless entry keypad, you
can:
• lock or unlock the vehicle doors
and liftgate without using the key.
• open the liftgate window.
• disable/enable autolock.
• arm and disarm the perimeter
alarm system (if equipped).
See also Remote entry system and
Perimeter alarm system in this
chapter for more information.
Your vehicle has a factory-set 5–digit
code that operates the keyless entry
system. You can also program your
own 5–digit personal entry code.
The factory-set code is located:
• On the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment,
• Taped to the computer module, or
• At your dealer.
When using the keyless entry keypad, press the middle of each button in
order to ensure a good activation.
122
Controls and features
Programming your own personal entry code
1. Enter the factory-set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed).
2. Press the 1/2 control within five
seconds of step 1.
3. Enter your personal 5 digit code.
Enter each digit within five seconds
of the previous one.
Do not set a code that includes
three of the same number or
presents them in sequential order;
these types of codes are easier to
figure out.
Your personal code does not replace
the permanent code that the
dealership gave you. You can use
either code to unlock your vehicle.
If a second personal code is entered,
the module will erase the first personal code in favor of the new code.
To exit, press 7/8 and 9/0 simultaneously or allow more than 5 seconds
to elapse since a button press occurred and the 5 digit keycode will be
programmed.
123
Controls and features
If you wish to erase your personal code, use the following instructions:
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1/2 within five seconds of
step 1 and release.
3. Press the 1/2 control and hold for
2 seconds to erase the customer
programmed keycode, within five
seconds of step 2.
The system will now only respond
to the factory-set code.
Anti-scan feature
The anti-scan feature prevents
repeated attempts at arriving at a
valid key code.
The system will ignore keypad
presses for one minute if the user
has pressed it 35 consecutive times
without entering a valid code. This
feature is to prevent unauthorized
entry.
During the anti-scan operation the
keypad lamp will flash.
Anti-scan will be turned off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• the remote entry transmitter
UNLOCK button is pressed.
• the ignition is turned to the ON position
• a key turned to the UNLOCK position on the driver’s door (if the
vehicle is equipped with Perimeter Anti-Theft)
124
Controls and features
Unlocking the doors and liftgate or the liftgate window with the
keyless entry system
The driver’s door must be unlocked before any other. If more than five
seconds pass between pressing numbers, enter the code again. The
system has shut down if the keypad light is out. If the keyless entry
system does not work, use the key or remote entry transmitter(s).
1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter one of the two codes. After pressing
the fifth number, the driver’s door unlocks.
2. To unlock all the other door(s)
and liftgate, press the 3/4 control
within five seconds of unlocking the
driver’s door.
3. To open the liftgate window,
enter the five-digit factory-set code,
then press the 5/6 control within
five seconds.
125
Controls and features
Locking the doors and liftgate, press
the 7/8 and 9/0 controls at the same
time. This can be done only when
the driver’s door is closed.
Autolock
The autolock feature will lock all of the vehicle doors when:
• all doors are closed
• the engine is running and
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door, liftgate or liftgate window is opened then closed while the
engine is running, the brake pedal is released, and
• you put the vehicle in motion
Deactivating/activating autolock
There are 3 methods to enable/disable this feature. One through your
dealer, the second with a power door unlock/lock sequence and the third
with the keypad.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is off, and all vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed.
126
Controls and features
Power door unlock/lock
procedure
You must complete steps 1-5 within
30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the
procedure needs to be repeated,
you must wait 30 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Keyless entry key pad procedure
1. Enter 5 digit entry code
2. Press and hold 7/8 control
3. Press and release 3/4 control
4. Release 7/8 control.
The user should receive a horn
chirp to indicate the system has
been disabled or a chirp followed by
a honk to indicate the system has
been enabled.
Smart unlock
This feature prevents the driver’s door from locking while the key is in
the ignition. This feature will unlock only the driver’s door if the key is in
the ignition cylinder, the driver’s door is ajar and all doors are locked
using the interior trim switch. If these conditions are met, the entire
vehicle will lock and the driver’s door will unlock within 1 second.
127
Controls and features
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
The perimeter anti-theft system will help prevent your vehicle from
unauthorized entry.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership,
to aid in troubleshooting.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will help prevent your vehicle from
unauthorized entry.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership,
to aid in troubleshooting.
Power door lock disable feature
This feature will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry.
This feature disables the power door locks and liftgate power door lock
control if all doors are closed and the perimeter alarm becomes armed.
Once the locks are disabled, they only become active when the perimeter
alarm is disarmed or a door, liftgate, liftgate window or hood is open.
Deactivating/activating power door lock disable feature
1. Verify that the alarm is not
armed, the ignition is in the OFF
position and all doors and windows
are closed.
2. Turn the ignition key to ON, then
press the UNLOCK button 3 times.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF,
then press the UNLOCK button 3
times.
4. Turn the ignition key to RUN; the horn will chirp once to confirm
programming mode is entered.
5. Press the UNLOCK button and then the LOCK button. The horn will
chirp once to verify that the autolock feature has been disabled, or chirp
twice to indicate the system has been enabled.
6. Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. A horn chirp will follow if
the state has been changed.
128
Controls and features
Arming the system
When armed, this system will help protect your vehicle from
unauthorized entry. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will
flash the headlamps and/or parking lamps, and will chirp the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
ignition. Any of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
• Open any door, liftgate or liftgate
window and press the power door
lock control to lock the doors.
• Press the remote entry lock
control (doors opened or closed).
When you press the lock control
twice within three seconds on your
remote entry transmitter, the horn
will chirp once to let you know that
all doors/hood/liftgate and liftgate
window are closed. If any of these are not closed, the horn will chirp
twice to warn you that a door/hood/liftgate or liftgate window is still
open.
• Press 7/8 and 9/0 controls on the
keyless entry pad at the same
time to lock the doors (driver’s
door must be closed).
There is a 20 second countdown
when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes ARMED.
Each door/hood/liftgate or liftgate
window is armed individually, and if
any are open, they must be closed
for the system to enter the 20
second countdown.
The parking lamps will flash once
when all doors/hood/liftgate and
liftgate window are closed indicating
the vehicle is locked and entering the 20 second countdown.
129
Controls and features
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using your
remote entry transmitter.
• Unlock the doors by using your
keyless entry pad.
• Unlock the driver’s door with a key. Turn the key full travel (toward
the front of the vehicle) to make sure the alarm disarms.
• Turn ignition to ON.
130
Controls and features
• Press the PANIC control on the
remote entry transmitter. This
will only shut off the horn and
parking lamps when the alarm is
sounding. The alarm system will
still be armed.
• Press the liftgate window control
on the remote entry transmitter.
The liftgate and liftgate window
are no longer armed, but the
doors and hood are still armed.
To disarm the doors and hood,
press the liftgate power door lock
control.
Pressing the power door UNLOCK trim switch within the 20 second
prearmed mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, liftgate, liftgate window or hood is opened without using the
door key, keypad or the remote entry transmitter.
SECURILOCKY PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started
unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used.
The SecuriLocky passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
THEFT INDICATOR
The theft indicator is the flashing red indicator located on top of the
instrument panel.
131
Controls and features
• When the ignition is in the OFF position, the indicator will flash once
every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLocky system is functioning as
a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the ON position, the indicator will glow for 3
seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLocky system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the ON position. If this
occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed approximately
15 seconds after switching the
ignition to the 2 (ACC) position.
The THEFT indicator on top of the
instrument panel will flash every
two seconds when the vehicle is
armed.
3
2
4
1
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle. The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then
go out. If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or
flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealership or a
qualified technician.
Key information
Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will
start your vehicle. Spare coded keys can be purchased from your
dealership. Your dealership can program your key or you can “do it
yourself.” Refer to Programming spare keys.
The following items may prevent the vehicle from starting:
• Large metallic objects
• Electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase
gasoline or similar items
• A second key on the same key ring as the coded key
132
Controls and features
If any of these items are present, you need to keep these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects and
devices cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a momentary “no
start” condition if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a
problem occurs, turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all other
objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make
sure the coded key is an approved Ford coded key.
If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do the following:
• Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or
• Have your vehicle towed to a dealership or a locksmith. The key codes
will need to be erased from your vehicle and new key codes will need
to be re-coded.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an
extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent
an unforeseen inconvenience.
The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the
wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no start” condition.
If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a “no
start” condition.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLocky keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
133
Controls and features
1. Insert the first previously
3
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from 2
2
(ACC) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition
in 3 (ON) for at least one second).
4
2. Turn ignition to 1 (LOCK) and
remove the first coded key from
the ignition.
1
3. Within ten seconds of turning the
ignition to 2 (ACC), insert the
second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the
ignition from 2 (ACC) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least
one second but no more than ten seconds).
4. Turn the ignition to 1 (LOCK) and remove the second coded key
from the ignition.
5. Within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to 2 (ACC), insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from 2 (ACC) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least
one second). This step will program your new key to a coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this
procedure from step 1.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat steps 1
through 6. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to
have the new spare key(s) programmed.
134
Seating and safety restraints
SEATING
Front seat Adjustable head restraints (if equipped)
Your vehicle’s front seats are equipped with head restraints which are
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit
head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to
raise and lower the head restraints.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push control to lower head restraint.
Adjusting the front manual seat
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
135
Seating and safety restraints
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
136
Seating and safety restraints
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press front to raise or lower the
front portion of the seat cushion.
Press rear to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
137
Seating and safety restraints
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Memory seat/easy entry/exit feature (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat to
three programmable positions.
SET
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat to the desired
1
2
position using the seat controls.
Press the SET control. The SET
control indicator light will briefly
illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
• To program position three, repeat the previous procedure but press
controls 1 and 2 simultaneously.
A position can only be set or recalled when the transmission gearshift is
in Park or Neutral. A memory seat position may be programmed at any
time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Controls and features chapter.
The easy entry/exit feature automatically moves the drivers seat
backwards slightly (if room is available) when the key is removed from
the ignition. It will automatically move the seat forward to the original
position when the key is inserted into the ignition.
138
Seating and safety restraints
Using the manual lumbar support
Turn the lumbar support control
toward the front of vehicle to move
the lumbar support forward for
more direct support.
Turn the lumbar support control
toward the rear of vehicle to move
the lumbar support back for less
direct support.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
• Push control located on the seat
to activate.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seat icon in the dual electronic automatic temperature
control (DEATC) will illuminate when activated.
139
Seating and safety restraints
REAR SEATS
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle’s rear seats may be equipped with head restraints which are
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit
head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to
raise and lower the head restraints.
Push or pull the head rests to the
desired position.
Folding down the 60/40 rear seats (if equipped)
If the rear seat is equipped with adjustable head restraints, they should
be placed in the full down position before folding the seat back down.
140
Seating and safety restraints
1. Press the lower release control
downward to unlatch the seatback.
2. Rotate the seatback downward
into the load floor position.
3. Press down on the top outboard
area of the seatback until a click is
heard. The seat is now latched in
the floor position.
To return the seat to the upright
position:
• Press downward on the upper
corner of the seatback and hold.
• Pull the release handle upward to
unlatch the seat.
• Rotate the seatback upward until
the seatback latches in the
upright position. The seatback
will click when it is locked into
position.
141
Seating and safety restraints
To return the seat to the upright position:
• Press downward on the upper corner of the seatback and hold.
• Pull the release handle upward to unlatch the seat.
• Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright
position. The seatback will click when it is locked into position.
Folding down the 40/20/40 rear seats
Ensure that the headrest is in the down position and no objects such as
books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row
seats before folding them down.
Move front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat headrest
clears the front seat.
For assistance, refer to the label located on the lower position of the
opening.
1. Locate handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
2. Pull the handle down and push
the seatback toward the front of the
vehicle.
3. Press down on the top outboard
area of the seatback until a click is
heard.
142
Seating and safety restraints
To return the seat to the upright
position:
1. Pull the handle down and lift the
seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
Adjusting the 2nd row seat for E-Z Entry (if equipped)
The E-Z Entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the 3rd
row seat.
To enter the 3rd row seat:
1. Fold down the 2nd row seat.
2. Pull the handle all the way down
until the seat releases from the floor
and folds away.
143
Seating and safety restraints
3. To return the seat to a seating
position, flip the seat into the
upright position.
4. Make sure the seat is latched to
the floor.
To exit the 3rd row seat, pull the
red access control lever up releasing
the seat from the floor and rotate
the seat up towards the front seat.
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
144
Seating and safety restraints
Folding the middle 2nd row seat (If equipped)
1. Locate the lever on the side of
the seatback.
2. Pull the lever up and push the
seatback toward the front of the
vehicle.
3. Press down on the top outboard
area of the seatback until a click is
heard.
To return the seatback to the
upright position:
1. Pull the lever and lift the
seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
145
Seating and safety restraints
Third row seat (if equipped)
3rd row stow feature
The 3rd row seat has a tip/stow feature to increase cargo space without
removing the seat from the vehicle.
To put seat in stowed position:
1. Pull the seat release lever located
on top of the seatback while
pushing the seatback down onto the
seat cushion.
2. The seatback will latch into place.
3. Push the closeout panel forward
over the space between the seats.
To put seat in upright position:
1. Pull back the slider panel on the
seatback to release the closeout
panel.
146
Seating and safety restraints
2. Pull the seat release lever located
on top of the seatback while lifting
the seatback into the upright
position.
3. The seatback will latch into place.
The third row seat is equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts
in both seating positions. For information on the proper operation of the
safety restraints, refer to Safety Restraints in this chapter.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of air bag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints.
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the air bags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the personal safety system work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
147
Seating and safety restraints
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or air bags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined the
accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front air bags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage air bags offer the capability to tailor the level of air bag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Air bag Supplemental Restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage air bags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage air bag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver air bag by providing a lower air bag output level.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the air bag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety Belt section in this chapter.
148
Seating and safety restraints
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to tighten the safety belts
firmly against the occupant’s body during a collision. This maximizes the
effectiveness of the safety belts and helps properly position the occupant
relative to the air bag to improve protection. The safety belt
pretensioners can be either activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the air bags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be
pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in
response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load
on the occupant. Refer to Safety Belt section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning Light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the air bag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following:
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician
immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
149
Seating and safety restraints
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
150
Seating and safety restraints
Energy management feature
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay
out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help
reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
After any vehicle collision, the seat belt system at all passenger
seating positions must be checked by a qualified technician to
verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is
still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked
for proper function.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in collisions.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
151
Seating and safety restraints
The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat
outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Vehicle sensitive mode
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 8 km/h or more, the combination safety belts (where
fitted) will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
• Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or
outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and
under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever
possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for
Children later in this chapter.
152
Seating and safety restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is extracted.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, all passenger seat belt systems must
be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the
“automatic locking retractor” feature for child seats is still functioning
properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper
function.
153
Seating and safety restraints
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in collisions.
Lap belts
Adjusting the lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
• 2nd row center seating
position — 60/40
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
154
Seating and safety restraints
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
• 2nd row center seating
position — 40/20/40
155
Seating and safety restraints
The lap belt will adjust
automatically. To fasten, grasp the
tongue, and with a continuous
motion, pull out enough webbing to
buckle the tongue into the correct
buckle. If you did not pull out
enough webbing to reach the
buckle, allow the tongue to retract
fully before trying to pull it out
again.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
right front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same
crash sensor system as the front air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap
and shoulder belt is tightened.
When the safety canopy system and the front airbags are activated, the
safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger seating
positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt is properly
buckled.
The driver and the right front passenger seat belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front air bags and safety belt pretensioners.
Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.
156
Seating and safety restraints
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the front and
second row outboard seating
positions. Adjust the height of the
shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
squeeze the button and slide the
height adjuster down. To raise the
height of the shoulder belt, slide the
height adjuster up. Pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm
(8 inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
157
Seating and safety restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph)
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has
been turned to ON...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
158
Then...
The BeltMinder feature is activated the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until safety belt is
buckled.
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
Seating and safety restraints
If...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
Then...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the seat belt warning
function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and
illuminating the seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
If...
The driver’s seat belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph)
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has
been turned to ON...
The driver’s seat belt is buckled
while the seat belt indicator light
is illuminated and the seat belt
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s seat belt is buckled
before the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position...
Then...
The BeltMinder feature is activated the seat belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for 6
seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until seat
belt is buckled.
The BeltMinder feature will not activate.
The BeltMinder feature will not activate.
The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear
safety belts all of the time.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”
“I’m not going far”
Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
159
Seating and safety restraints
Reasons given...
“Belts are uncomfortable”
“I was in a hurry”
“Seat belts don’t work”
“Traffic is light”
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
“I have an air bag”
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Consider...
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
Air bags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.
160
Seating and safety restraints
One time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission).
• the ignition switch is in the OFF position
• all vehicle doors are closed
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped
with Autolamps, the Autolamps feature MUST be turned off.)
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2
minutes)
• Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder
warning activation.
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled.
• After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
161
Seating and safety restraints
• This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable
BeltMinder if it is currently disabled.
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety
belt warning light four times per second for three seconds.
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by flashing the safety
belt warning light four times per second for three seconds, followed by
three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then followed by
flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second for three
seconds again.
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped),
LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and
attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor
Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor
and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning
chapter.
162
Seating and safety restraints
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module
which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the
event of a collision this module may save information related to the
collision including information about the air bag system and impact
severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in servicing
the vehicle and in helping to better understand real world collisions and
further improve the safety of future vehicles.
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions
The supplemental restraint system
is designed to work with the safety
belt to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain
upper body injuries.
Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying air bag is greatest close to
the trim covering the air bag
module.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.
163
Seating and safety restraints
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the air bag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame,
bumper, front end body structure and non-Ford tow hooks may
effect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation
of additional equipment.
164
Seating and safety restraints
Children and air bags
For additional important safety
information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Air bags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active air bag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?
The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates air
bag inflation.
The fact that the air bags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Front air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
165
Seating and safety restraints
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
air bag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
166
Seating and safety restraints
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and
air bags).
• side air curtains (if equipped). Refer to Side air curtain system later
in this chapter.
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• a readiness light and tone.
• diagnostic module.
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section
in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
167
Seating and safety restraints
Safety CanopyY system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopyy. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopyy could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopyy
system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a
vehicle containing a Safety Canopyy. See your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an air bag SRS and Safety
Canopyy system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopyy.
168
Seating and safety restraints
How does the Safety CanopyY system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopyy system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopyy).
The Safety Canopyy system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one each side of the vehicle).
• The headliner will flex to open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopyy deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two side crash sensors mounted at the base of the B-pillar (one on
each side).
• Two side crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors
(one on each side).
• Roll over sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopyy system, in combination with seat belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats (if equipped). The Safety Canopyy will
not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or
booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side window openings.
The Safety Canopyy system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
169
Seating and safety restraints
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopyy inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopyy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above the first and second row seats. In certain lateral
collisions or rollover events, the Safety Canopyy system will be
activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopyy is
designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover
events.
The fact that the Safety Canopyy system did not activate in a collision
does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The
Safety Canopyy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover
likelihood.
Several Safety Canopyy
system components get hot
after inflation. Do not touch them
after inflation.
If the Safety Canopyy
system has deployed, the
Safety Canopyy will not
function again. The Safety
Canopyy system (including the
A, B and C pillar trim) must be
inspected and serviced by a
qualified technician in
accordance with the vehicle
service manual. If the Safety
Canopyy is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
170
Seating and safety restraints
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness
section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the air
bag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision
or rollover event.
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local
dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by
qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who
are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your
local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the
safety of children in your vehicle.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
171
Seating and safety restraints
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear
seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old).
172
Seating and safety restraints
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs.
173
Seating and safety restraints
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
174
Seating and safety restraints
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Air bag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the
safety seat, with the tongue
between the child seat and the
release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether
straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps. in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
175
Seating and safety restraints
Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt
seating positions
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
176
Seating and safety restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
177
Seating and safety restraints
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Installing child safety seat in the second row center seating
position with an automatic locking retractor
1. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
2. In a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing from the retractor to
route the tongue through the child seat.
3. While holding the webbing to prevent it from retracting, route the
webbing through the child seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle for that seating position until
you hear and feel the buckle engage. Make sure the buckle is latched
securely by pulling on the webbing.
178
Seating and safety restraints
5. If you have not pulled out enough webbing to reach, allow the
webbing to fully retract before attempting to pull it out again and repeat
steps 2 through 4.
6. Pull the webbing through the child seat toward the retractor while
pushing down with your knee on the child seat.
7. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. It will
make a clicking noise while doing this.
8. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and side-to-side to make sure the seat is securely held in place.
9. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each
use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as shown below.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• 5 passenger vehicle
• 7 passenger vehicle
179
Seating and safety restraints
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the rear seat cushion.
2. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head
restraint posts.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position.
When placing a child safety seat in the 2nd row center seating position
of the 5 passenger vehicle, the tether straps may be attached to either of
the tether anchors located at the rear of the cargo area.
• Behind 2nd row seat
180
Seating and safety restraints
• At the rear of the cargo area
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.
5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and
shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further
instructions to secure the child safety seat.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
181
Starting
PREPARING TO START YOUR VEHICLE
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and safety restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
182
Starting
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
3. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
3
2
4
1
CHECK
GAGE
O/D
OFF
4X4
LOW
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
4X4
HIGH
BRAKE
DOOR
AJAR
LOW
WASH
CHECK
FUEL
CAP
TRIP
183
Starting
HI TEMP
LOW OIL
O/D
OFF
4X4
LOW
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
4X4
HIGH
BRAKE
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the
light may not illuminate.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
1. Turn the key to 4 (START)
3
without pressing the accelerator
pedal and release as soon as the
2
engine starts. The key will return to
3 (ON).
4
2. If the temperature is above –12°C
(10°F) and the engine does not
start within five seconds on the first
1
try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10
seconds and try again.
3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not
start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10
seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to
START position.
4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up.
5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and
drive.
184
Starting
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, you may
experience increased cranking times, rough idle or hesitation until the
engine has warmed up. Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of
winter grade ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to OFF and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system (see Air
Cleaner decal). Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to
the engine and possible personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and care chapter for
more information on ethanol.
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions
1. Press the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor and hold.
2. Turn the key to START position.
3. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up.
4. If the engine still fails to start, repeat steps one through three.
5. After the engine starts, hold your foot on the brake pedal, put the
gearshift lever in gear and release the parking brake. Slowly release the
brake pedal and drive away in a normal manner.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves
starting, warms up the engine faster and allows the heater-defroster
system to respond quickly. Use of an engine block heater is strongly
recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23° C
(-10° F) or below.
For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting
the vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not harm
the engine, so the heater can be plugged in the night before starting the
vehicle.
185
Starting
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle,
have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and
could kill you.
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever:
• the vehicle is raised for service.
• the sound of the exhaust system changes.
• the vehicle has been damaged in a collision.
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for
long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch).
Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air.
Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow,
leaves and other debris.
186
Driving
BRAKES
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance.
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning;
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture,
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service
technician.
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear.
Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat
and become less effective.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
On vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise
while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or
snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s
anti-lock brake system. The ABS performs a self-check after you start
the engine and begin to drive away. A brief mechanical noise may be
heard during this test. This is normal. If a malfunction is found, the ABS
warning light will come on. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be
inspected by a qualified service technician.
187
Driving
The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for
this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when
the brakes are firmly applied. The
accompanying illustration depicts
the advantage of an ABS equipped
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking
traction.
ABS warning lamp
ABS
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the
ABS needs to be serviced.
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock
brake system is disabled and normal
braking is still effective unless the
brake warning light also remains
illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.)
Using ABS
• In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel
ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full
steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient
space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a
controlled stop.
• The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping distance. Always leave
enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to
stop.
• We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks.
188
Driving
Brake Assist (if equipped as part of the AdvanceTracY system)
The Brake Assist system provides full braking force during panic braking
situations. It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and
maximizes the amount of brake booster assist, helping the driver to
achieve maximum braking pressure. Once a panic brake application is
detected, the system will remain activated as long as the brake pedal is
depressed. The system is deactivated by releasing the brake pedal.
When the system activates, the brake pedal will travel with very little
effort; this is normal.
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
189
Driving
Pull the release lever to release the
brake. Driving with the parking
brake on will cause the brakes to
wear out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
ADVANCETRAC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
The AdvanceTracy system provides a stability enhancement feature as
well as a traction enhancement feature. It helps your vehicle maintain
traction, when driving on slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting
and controlling wheel spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by
momentarily reducing engine power and rapidly applying the anti-lock
brakes. The system is a driver aid which makes your vehicle easier to
handle primarily on snow and ice-covered roads.
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTracy system off by pressing the AdvanceTracy button.
This will allow your tires to “dig” for traction.
If the AdvanceTracy system is activated excessively in a short period of
time, the brake portion of the system will shut down to allow the brakes
to cool down. A limited AdvanceTracy function using only engine power
reduction will still help control the wheels from over-spinning. When the
brakes have cooled down, the system will again function normally.
Anti-lock braking is not affected by this condition and will function
normally during the cool-down period.
AdvanceTracy enhances your vehicle’s stability during maneuvers that
require all available tire traction, like in wet/snowy/icy road conditions
and/or when performing emergency maneuvers. In an emergency
lane-change, the driver will experience better overall vehicle traction,
and have better control of the vehicle.
The AdvanceTracy system helps the driver maintain steering control if
the vehicle begins to slide excessively left or right or spin out.
AdvanceTracy will attempt to correct the sliding motion by applying
brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by reducing engine
power.
190
Driving
Driving conditions which may activate AdvanceTracy include:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Hitting a patch of ice
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Hitting a curb while turning
• Driving on slick surfaces
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
Towing in this chapter)
The AdvanceTracy system automatically turns on when the engine is
started. However, the system does not function when the vehicle is
traveling in R (Reverse) or, if equipped with four-wheel drive, in 4L (4X4
LOW). In R (Reverse) or in 4L (4X4 LOW), ABS and the traction
enhancement feature will continue to function.
The AdvanceTracy button allows
the driver to control the availability
of the AdvanceTracy system.
AdvanceTracy system status is
indicated by a warning indicator
light with a “sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster that will flash
when the system is active and an indicator light in the control button
that will illuminate when the system is turned off. In vehicles with a
message center, the message “ADVANCETRAC OFF” will be displayed.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTracy system, the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the engine is
running, have the system serviced immediately.
Pressing the control once will disable the AdvanceTracy stability
enhancement and the engine power reduction portion of the traction
enhancement feature; the brake portion of the traction enhancement
feature will still function normally. Pressing and holding the control for
more than five seconds will disable the AdvanceTracy stability
enhancement and traction enhancement feature. If the vehicle is stuck
in snow or mud or when driving in deep sand, switching off the
AdvanceTracy system may be beneficial so the wheels are allowed to
191
Driving
spin. If your vehicle seems to lose engine power while driving in deep
sand or very deep snow, switching off the AdvanceTracy stability
enhancement feature will restore full engine power and will enhance
momentum through the obstacle.
Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the
AdvanceTracy performs a system self-check. During AdvanceTracy
operation you may experience the following:
• A rumble or grinding noise
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The AdvanceTracy indicator light will flash
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal will move to apply higher brake forces. You may also hear
a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe
condition.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTracy operation.
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTracy system. Also, do not install a stereo
loudspeaker near the rear console or either rear seat. The
speaker vibrations can adversely affect the AdvanceTracy
sensors located in this area.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of an AdvanceTracy event
is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their
ability to grip the road and that you may lose control of the vehicle. If
you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
If you find yourself regularly experiencing AdvanceTracy events,
you are driving too fast for conditions, you should reduce your
speed, and drive less aggressively. It is always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driving habits under severe
conditions. The occurrence of an AdvanceTracy event is an indication
that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this may cause you to lose control of the vehicle increasing the
risk of severe personal injury or property damage.
192
Driving
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.
To prevent damage to the power steering pump:
• Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could be caused by any of
the following:
• Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
• Uneven vehicle loading
• High crown in center of road
• High crosswinds
• Wheels out of alignment
• Loose or worn suspension components
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it
capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special
design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give
the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
193
Driving
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the
capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
2. Locate the access cover plate to
the brake-shift interlock override. It
is located on the underside of the
steering column.
194
Driving
3. Rotate the access panel
(counterclockwise) with a flat head
screw driver until it is lined up to
the access hole in the open position.
4. Insert a tool (or screw driver) into the access hole to override the
brake-shift interlock. Apply the brake and shift into Neutral.
5. Return the cover plate (rotate
clockwise) to the closed position.
Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
195
Driving
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission
Your automatic transmission electronically controls the shift feel by using
an adaptive learning strategy. This feature is designed to increase
durability, and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. It
is normal for a new transmission to shift firmly. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Once the vehicle is at operating temperature it may take
several shifts at the same operating condition for the transmission to
properly adapt. Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. The more varied the driving habits, speed and
torque, the longer it may take to adapt but the more complete the
process will be.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Understanding gearshift lever positions
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever
from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
196
Driving
P (Park)
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal,
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park).
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). Make
sure the gearshift lever is securely
latched in P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents
the rear wheels from turning.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R
(Reverse), the vehicle will move
backward. Always come to a
complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N
(Neutral), the vehicle can be started
and is free to roll. Hold the brake
pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The transmission control indicator
light (TCIL) will illuminate on the
instrument cluster.
O/D
OFF
197
Driving
Drive (overdrive deactivated)
Activate by pressing the
transmission control switch on the
end of the gearshift lever with the
gearshift lever in the D(Drive) position. The transmission with overdrive
off operates in gears one through four, providing more engine braking
than D(Drive) with Overdrive ON and is useful whenever driving
conditions (i.e., city traffic, hilly terrain, etc.) cause the transmission to
excessively shift between D (Overdrive) and other gears. Deactivate D
(Overdrive) when:
• driving with a heavy load.
• towing a trailer up or down steep hills.
• additional engine braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer to
Driving while you tow in the Trailer Towing chapter.
To return to D (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch
at the end of the gear shift lever. The TCIL will no longer be illuminated.
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically
return to normal D (Overdrive) mode.
3 (Third)
Transmission operates in third gear
only.
Used for improved traction on
slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third) provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on
slippery roads or to provide
additional engine braking on
downgrades.
1 (First)
Use 1 (First) to provide maximum
engine braking on steep
downgrades. Upshifts can be made
by shifting to 2 (Second) or to (Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher
speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear and will shift to 1
(First) after the vehicle decelerates to the proper vehicle speed.
198
Driving
Forced Downshifts
To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when passing
another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will
downshift to the appropriate gear: fourth, third, second or first gear.
Manual transmission operation (if equipped)
Using the clutch
Vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission have a starter interlock
that prevents starting the engine
unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
When starting a vehicle with a
manual transmission:
1. Hold down the brake pedal.
2. Put the gearshift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Depress the clutch pedal.
4. Start the engine and let it idle for a few seconds.
• Put the gearshift lever in 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Move foot from brake to accelerator and begin to release the clutch
slowly while gradually pressing down on the accelerator.
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Do not use
the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill.
These actions may reduce clutch life.
Parking
1. Apply the brake and shift into N
(Neutral).
199
Driving
2. Engage the parking brake.
3. Shift into 1 (First).
4. Turn the ignition to Off.
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly
and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake
fully.
Recommended shift speeds
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
Transfer case position (if equipped)
AUTO or HIGH
LOW
1-2
14 km/h (9 mph)
5 km/h (3 mph)
2-3
32 km/h (20 mph)
11 km/h (7 mph)
3-4
50 km/h (31 mph)
19 km/h (12 mph)
4 -5 (Overdrive)
71 km/h (44 mph)
27 km/h (17 mph)
Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
Transfer case position (if equipped)
AUTO or HIGH
LOW
1-2
16 km/h (10 mph)
6 km/h (4 mph)
2-3
26 km/h (16 mph)
10 km/h (6 mph)
3-4
43 km/h (27 mph)
16 km/h (10 mph)
4 - 5 (Overdrive)
68 km/h (42 mph)
26 km/h (16 mph)
200
Driving
Shift from:
5 (Overdrive) - 4
4-3
3-2
2-1
Maximum downshift speeds
Transfer case position (if equipped)
AUTO or HIGH
LOW
88 km/h (55 mph)
34 km/h (21 mph)
72 km/h (45 mph)
27 km/h (17 mph)
56 km/h (35 mph)
21 km/h (13 mph)
32 km/h (20 mph)
11 km/h (7 mph)
Reverse
Ensure that the vehicle is at a complete stop before shifting into R
(Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
Put the gearshift lever into N and wait at least several seconds before
shifting into R.
You can shift into R (Reverse) only by moving the gearshift lever from
left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) gears before you shift into R (Reverse).
This is a special lockout feature that protects you from accidentally
shifting into R (Reverse) when you downshift from 5 (Overdrive).
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
When Four-wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD power can be selected when
additional driving power is desired.
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and the 4x4
Low button is pressed while the vehicle is moving, the system will
not engage and no damage will occur to the 4WD system.
4x4 High and 4x4 Low operation is not recommended on dry
pavement. Doing so could result in difficult disengagement of the
transfer case, increased tire wear and decreased fuel economy.
Control-Trac automatic four-wheel drive system
The 4WD system uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This
increases traction, enabling you to drive your 4x4 over terrain and road
conditions not normally traveled by two-wheel drive vehicles.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case that allows
you to select a four-wheel drive mode best suited for your current
driving conditions.
201
Driving
Positions of the Control-Trac system
The Control-Trac system functions in three modes:
• The 4x4 Auto mode provides
four-wheel drive with full power
delivered to the rear axle, and to
the front axle as required for
increased traction. This is
appropriate for normal on-road
operating conditions, such as dry
road surfaces, wet pavement,
snow and gravel.
• The 4x4 High mode provides
four-wheel drive with full power
to both axles. It is only intended
for severe winter or off-road
conditions, such as deep snow
and ice (where no dry or wet
pavement remains uncovered),
and shallow sand.
202
Driving
• The 4x4 Low mode supplies
four-wheel drive with full power
to both axles and includes a
lower gear ratio for low-speed. It
is only intended for off-road
applications that require extra
power including deep sand, steep
grades and pulling a boat and
trailer out of the water.
The vehicle should not be operated in 4x4 High and 4x4 Low on
dry or merely wet pavement. Doing so will produce excessive
noise, increase tire wear and may damage driveline components.
These modes are intended for use only on consistently slippery or
loose surfaces.
If your vehicle is equipped with 4WD, a spare tire of a different
size than the road tires should never be used. Such a tire could
make the vehicle difficult to control and as well as result in damage to
driveline components.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
203
Driving
Using the Control Trac 4WD system
4X4 AUTO - Power to all four wheels; used for normal street and
highway driving.
4X4 HIGH (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy
roads or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.
4X4 LOW (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power
to all four wheels. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep
sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4X4 LOW (4WD Low) will
not engage while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4X4 LOW (4WD Low) for
proper operation.
204
Driving
Using the Control Trac system
Shifting between 4x4 Auto and 4x4 High
When you press the 4x4 High
button, the indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
When you press the 4x4 Auto
button, the indicator light will turn
off.
Either shift can be done at a stop or
while driving at any speed.
4X4
Auto
4X4
High
4X4
Low
Shifting from 4x4 Auto or 4x4 High to 4x4 Low
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral)
(automatic transmission) or depress
the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Press the 4x4 Low button. When
engaged the 4x4 Low instrument
cluster light and the 4x4 Low button
will illuminate.
4X4
Auto
4X4
High
4X4
Low
The 4X4 LOW button will flash if:
1. The system is waiting for driver input (brake and/or neutral gear). OR
2. There is a 4X4 low shift in progress.
If the driver inputs are not engaged, the button selection will time-out
and the 4X4 system will remain in its current mode.
205
Driving
Shifting from 4x4 Low to 4x4 Auto or 4x4 High
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral)
(automatic transmission) or depress
the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Press the 4x4 Auto or the 4x4
High button. When 4x4 Auto is
engaged NO indicator lights will
illuminate. When 4x4 High is
engaged the 4x4 High instrument
cluster light will illuminate.
4X4
Auto
4X4
High
4X4
Low
The 4X4 LOW button will flash if:
1. The system is waiting for driver input (brake and/or neutral gear). OR
2. There is a 4X4 low shift in progress.
If the driver inputs are not engaged, the button selection will time-out
and the 4X4 system will remain in its current mode.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
206
Driving
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, Ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
207
Driving
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking. Use all
available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
208
Driving
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle can’t.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows
you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case
operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving
chapter. Information on transfer
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
209
Driving
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
210
Driving
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a
steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control.
When you brake hard, the front
wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t
turning, you won’t be able to steer.
The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid
pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still
maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
211
Driving
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping as well as drive slower than usual and consider using one of
the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the
wheels. Use a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a
steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue
to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you
lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze
technique. If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional
information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
Tires, Replacement Requirements
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that
originally provided by Ford Motor Company because it can affect
the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
or death.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealer.
If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires
larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you should not use
these tires for highway driving.
If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor
Company, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure.
Do not use “aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications,
whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels.
212
Driving
These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling
characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over
and serious injury.
Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are
damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more
likely to blow out or fail.
You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure
found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left
front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire
pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles. Do not exceed the Ford Motor Company recommended pressure
even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire.
Each day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires, and adjust if
required. Check tire pressure with a
tire gauge every few weeks
(including spare). Safe operation
requires tires that are neither
underinflated nor overloaded.
Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or
other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes
or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary
repairs.
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal
damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected
in case it needs to be repaired or replaced.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide both reliable and reasonably predictable
performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends
that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts
(such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
213
Driving
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
LIMITED-SLIP AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
limited slip axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
limited slip rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
To reduce the risk of injury, never run the engine with one wheel
off the ground, such as when changing a tire.
VEHICLE LOADING
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms:
• Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or
aftermarket equipment.
• Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight
rating minus the weight of your vehicle.
• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload
weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification.
• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissible total
weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo.
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety
Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar.
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the
Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar.
• GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer.
214
Driving
• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissible
combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo)
and the loaded trailer.
• Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each
engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer
towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing
vehicle.
• Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.
• Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must
fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating.
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when
figuring the total weight.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the
originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s door pillar, lists
several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any
additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight
to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the
cab), the weight added should not exceed the front gross axle weight
rating (FGAWR). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front
axle reserve capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e.
restrict the number of occupants or amount of cargo carried).
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being
carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for
your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross
axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations
be exceeded.
215
Driving
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
this chapter.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow
1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR)
chart (in the Trailer Towing section) to find the maximum GCWR for
your type engine and rear axle ratio.
2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without
cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping
company or an inspection station for trucks.
3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the
following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow
and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight
on the chart.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars).
216
Driving
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause
internal transmission damage. Have the fluid checked and, if
water is found, replace the fluid.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 800 km
(500 miles).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight.
Your vehicle is equipped with a standard Class II integrated hitch and
requires only a draw bar and ball with a 19 mm (3/4 inch) shank
diameter. An optional Class III/Class IV hitch is also available.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
217
Driving
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Trailer towing table (4x2 w/manual transmission)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer weights
Trailer weight
Rear axle
Maximum
Engine
range-kg (lbs.)
ratio
GCWR-kg (lbs.)
(0-Maximum)
4.0L SOHC
3.73 LS
3175 (7000)
0-1179 (0-2600)
Notes: - For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300
meters (1000 ft) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table
and instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined
weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not
exceed the GCWR.
Towing a trailer over 1588 kg (3500 lbs.) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
4x2 w/automatic transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Rear axle ratio Maximum
Trailer weight
GCWR-kg
range-kg (lbs.)
(lbs.)
(0-Maximum)
4.0L SOHC/4.6L 3.55
3493 (7700)
0-1497 (0-3300)
4.0L SOHC
3.73 LS
4645 (10240)
0-2640 (0-5820)
4.6L*
3.73 LS
5262 (11600)
0-3257 (0-7180)
Notes: - For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300
meters (1000 ft) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table
and instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The
combined weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded
trailer must not exceed the GCWR.
218
Driving
4x2 w/automatic transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
*-When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and
on steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the
engine from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of
interior temperatures.
Towing a trailer over 1588 kg (3500 lbs.) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
Trailer towing table (4x4 w/manual transmission)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer weights
Trailer weight
Rear axle
Maximum
Engine
range-kg (lbs.)
ratio
GCWR-kg (lbs.)
(0-Maximum)
4.0L SOHC
3.73 LS
3175 (7000)
0- 1089 (0-2400)
Notes: - For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300
meters (1000 ft) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table
and instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined
weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not
exceed the GCWR.
Towing a trailer over 1588 kg (3500 lbs.) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
4x4 w/automatic transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Rear axle ratio Maximum
Trailer weight
GCWR-kg
range-kg (lbs.)
(lbs.)
(0-Maximum)
4.0L SOHC/4.6L 3.55
3629 (8000)
0-1542 (0-3400)
4.0L SOHC
3.73 LS
4536 (10000)
0-2440 (0-5380)
4.6L*
3.73 LS
5262 (11600)
0-3166 (0-6980)
219
Driving
4x4 w/automatic transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Engine
Rear axle ratio Maximum
Trailer weight
GCWR-kg
range-kg (lbs.)
(lbs.)
(0-Maximum)
Notes: - For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300
meters (1000 ft) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table
and instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The
combined weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded
trailer must not exceed the GCWR.
*-When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and/or
on steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the
engine from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of
interior temperatures.
Towing a trailer over 1588 kg (3500 lbs.) requires a weight distributing
hitch.
Trailer towing table (4x4 w/manual transmission)
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer weights
Trailer weight
Rear axle
Maximum
Engine
range-kg (lbs.)
ratio
GCWR-kg (lbs.)
(0-Maximum)
4.0L SOHC
3.73
3175 (7000)
0- 1089 (0-2400)
Notes: - For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 300
meters (1000 ft) elevation. For definitions of terms used in this table
and instructions on how to calculate your vehicle load, refer to Vehicle
loading in this chapter. Maximum trailer weights shown. The combined
weight of the completed towing vehicle and the loaded trailer must not
exceed the GCWR.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
220
Driving
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking
up trailer lamps.
Never connect any trailer lighting to the vehicle’s taillamp
circuits, because it may damage the electrical system resulting in
fire. Contact your local Ford dealership for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
221
Driving
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission section in this
chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for
more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
222
Driving
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
Recreational towing (all wheels on the ground)
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (such as behind a
recreational vehicle).
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) 4x2 vehicles:
This applies to all 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel drive
capability.
An example of recreational towing is towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. The following recreational towing guidelines are designed to
ensure that your transmission is not damaged.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is 56 km/h (35 mph).
• Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles).
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km/h (35 mph) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
4x4 vehicles with electronic shift transfer case (Neutral tow kit
accessory):
On vehicles equipped with 4WD, an accessory is available that allows you
to tow your vehicle, behind another vehicle, with all the wheels on the
ground. Contact your dealer for more details. Do not tow your vehicle
with all wheels on the ground unless you install the neutral tow kit as
vehicle damage may occur.
223
Driving
LUGGAGE RACK
Your vehicle is equipped with a roof
rack. The maximum recommended
load is 90 kg (200 lbs), evenly
distributed. If it is not possible to
distribute the load, position it as far
rearward as possible. Use the tie
down loops on the thumbwheels (if
equipped) to secure the load.
To adjust cross-bar position (if
equipped):
1. Loosen the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar (both
cross-bars are adjustable).
2. Slide the cross-bar to the desired
location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheel at both
ends of the cross-bar.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
that low-slung sport cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increase risk of vehicles rollover, personal injury and death.
224
Roadside emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 60,000 km
(36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and
four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• changing a flat tire
• jump-starts
• lock-out assistance
• limited fuel delivery
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• Coverage period
• Exact fuel amounts
• Towing of your disabled vehicle
• Emergency travel expense reimbursement
• Travel planning benefits
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
225
Roadside emergencies
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown,
approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the
ignition is off.
• The hazard lights control is
located on top of the steering
column.
• Depress hazard lights control to
activate all hazard flashers
simultaneously.
• Depress control again to turn the
flashers off.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
FUEL
RESET
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been activated.
226
Roadside emergencies
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the passenger’s foot well,
by the kick panel.
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pushing in on the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the OFF position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
227
Roadside emergencies
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
228
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
—
Yellow
—
Brown
—
Black
Roadside emergencies
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located below the
instrument panel on the driver’s
side.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel box.
6
16
21
26
7
17
22
27
8
18
23
28
9
19
24
29
10
20
25
30
11
1
2
3
4
12
13
14
15
5
229
Roadside emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows:
230
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
20A
20A
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5A
15A
10A
15A
–
–
10A
11
12
13
—
5A
5A
14
15
16
5A
5A
5A
17
15A
18
19
20
10A
10A
5A
21
5A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
Memory seat module
Heated seats, Moonroof
Radio, Amplifier, Power antenna,
DVD
Front wiper module
Flasher relay (Turn, hazards)
Right horn
Heated mirrors
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Heated backlight relay coil,
Heated seat module, Temp blend
actuator, A/C clutch contact
Not used (spare)
Foglamp switch, 4x4 module
Overdrive cancel switch, Flex fuel
sender
PATS module
Rear wiper module, Cluster, TPMS
Power mirror, Manual climate
control, TPMS
Delayed acc. coil, Battery saver,
Interior lamps (front and rear),
Glove compartment lamp
Left horn
RCM, PAD indicator
PATS, Driver seat switch, Memory
switch, Driver seat module, BSM,
Sunload sensor
Instrument cluster, Compass,
Flasher coil
Roadside emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
22
23
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
15A
24
25
15A
5A
26
7.5A
27
7.5A
28
29
5A
10A
30
5A
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
ABS, IVD Controller
Brake pedal position switch,
Driver brake applied relay,
Redundant cruise deactivate
switch
Cigar lighter, OBD II
Mode-Temperature actuator for
auxiliary climate control, Trailer
tow battery charge coil
Park aid, Brake shift interlock,
Approach lamp relay coil, IVD
switch
Electrochromatic mirror, Digital
transmission range sensor backup lamps
Radio (Start)/DVD (Start)
Digital transmission range sensor,
PWR feed to fuse #28 (Start feed)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL),
Remote solenoid, DEATC climate
controller
231
Roadside emergencies
Passenger compartment fuse panel (top side)
These relays are located on the reverse side of the passenger
compartment fuse panel. To access the relays you must remove the
passenger compartment fuse panel.
Fuse/Relay Location
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
Relay 5
Relay 6
Relay 7
232
Description
Flasher relay
Rear defrost
Delayed accessory relay
Open
Battery saver
Open
Open
Roadside emergencies
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is
located in the engine compartment.
The power distribution box contains
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to
the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
233
Roadside emergencies
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
234
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Amp
Rating
60A**
30A**
20A**
30A**
40A**
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
60A**
20A**
—
20A**
30A**
40A**
50A**
40A**
14
10A*
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
15A*
15A*
20A*
20A*
20A**
30A**
30A**
20A**
30A**
20A*
–
15A*
20A*
Power Distribution Box
Description
PJB
BSM
GCC pusher fan (export only)
Rear defrost
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
pump
Delayed accessory circuit breaker
Power point #2
Not used
Power point #1
ABS module (valves)
PTEC
Ignition relay/Starter relay
Trailer tow battery, Trailer tow
turn signals
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
(Canada)/Foglamps (export only)
Memory (KAPWR)
Headlamp switch
4x4 (v-batt 2)
4x4 (v-batt 1)
High beam relay
Electric brake
Front wiper motor
Autolamp; Low beam
Ignition switch
Rear fog lamps (Export only)
Not used
Fuel pump
Trailer tow lamps
Roadside emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Fuse Amp
Rating
20A*
60A**
20A**
—
—
30A**
30A**
20A**
40A**
15A*
15A*
15A*
15A*
15A*
10A*
10A*
15A*
5A*
20A*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Box
Description
Horn relay
PJB
Rear wiper motor
Not used
Not used
Auxiliary blower motor
Power seats, Adjustable pedals
Rear power point
Blower motor
A/C clutch relay/Transmission
Coil on plug
Injectors/Fuel pump relay
PTEC power
HEGO, VMV, CMS, PTEC
Right low beam
Left low beam
Front foglamps
Brake pressure switch
High beams
Horn relay
Fuel pump relay
High beam relay
Fog lamp relay
Police IVD relay
A/C clutch relay
Trailer tow right turn
Trailer tow left turn
Blower motor relay
Starter relay
PTEC relay
Ignition relay
235
Roadside emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
59
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
Power Distribution Box
Description
Driver brake applied or DRL relay
(Canada only)
60
—
PCM diode
61
—
A/C clutch diode
62
30A CB
Delayed accessory
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Cartridge Fuses
Rear Relay Box
The relay box is located on the rear passenger side quarter trim panel.
To access this box you must remove the trim panel.
The relays are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay Location
Relay 14
Relay 15
Relay 16
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Relay 20
236
Description
Not used
Trailer tow back- up lamps
Not used
Not used
Not used
Trailer tow park lamps
Trailer tow battery charge
Roadside emergencies
Fuse/Relay Location
Relay 21
Relay 22
Relay 23
Diode 3
Diode 4
Description
Not used
Approach lamps
Not used
Not used
Not used
Auxiliary relay box (Canadian vehicles equipped with
AdvanceTracY only)
The relay box is located on the front
right fender well underneath the
speed control module.
The relays are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay Location
Description
Relay 64
Police vehicles equipped with AdvanceTracy
Relay 65
Open
Relay 66
Open
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
237
Roadside emergencies
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may
compromise the integrity of your tires. The use of tire sealants
may also affect your tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped).
If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (if equipped)
in the Maintenance and care section for important information. If the
tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Spare tire information
The spare tire can be used as a spare or a regular tire. The spare is
identical to the other tires on your vehicle, although the wheel will not
match.
If your vehicle is equipped with 4WD or AWD, a spare tire of a
different size than the road tires should not be used. Use of such
a tire could result in damage to driveline components and an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Tool
Spare tire
Location
Under the vehicle, just in front of
the rear bumper. The spare tire
winch drive nut is located at the
rear center of the cargo area
under a lid.
Jack, lug nut wrench, jack handle Behind the rear seat under the
carpeted floor lid in the cargo
floor.
238
Roadside emergencies
Removing the jack
1. Open liftgate and remove the
carpeted floor lid and jack cover.
2. Turn jack screw eyelet
counterclockwise and remove the
jack from the bracket.
3. Remove the lug wrench from the
bag and rotate the wrench socket
out from the handle.
Removing the spare tire
Do not use an impact wrench on
the winch drive nut. This will
damage the spare tire winch
1. Open the cover from the
carpeting on cargo floor to expose
the winch drive nut.
2. Insert the lug wrench on the
winch drive nut.
The wrench will stop moving and
forward resistance to turning will be
felt when properly engaged.
239
Roadside emergencies
3. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise until tire is
lowered to the ground making sure
the other end of the wrench does
not scuff kick plate, the tire can be
slid rearward and the cable is
slightly slack.
4. Lift tire on one side and remove
the retainer from the spare tire.
Tire change procedure
To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be
sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
Refer to the tire changing instruction sheet for detailed tire change
instructions.
240
Roadside emergencies
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)
or in the reverse gear (manual
transmission) and turn engine OFF.
When one of the rear
wheels is off the ground,
the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving
or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or
reverse (manual transmission).
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
4. Use the tip of the lug wrench to
remove any beauty cap by twisting
the tip under the cap. The carpeted
floor lid can be used as a kneeling
pad.
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut by half
a turn, but do not remove them
until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
241
Roadside emergencies
6. Assemble the jack handle
extension on the lug nut wrench by
sliding the square end of the jack
handle through the plastic grommet
on the lug nut wrench and into the
square hole on the other side.
7. Position the jack on the frame
under the diamond shaped hole and
turn the jack handle clockwise until
the tire is a maximum of 25 mm
(1 inch) off the ground.
242
Roadside emergencies
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts, cone side in, until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully
1
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown.
12. Replace beauty cap, stow the
3
4
jack and tools in their respective
locations, making sure they are fully
secured so they do not rattle when
you drive.
5
2
13. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the spare tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
243
Roadside emergencies
2. Slide the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer through the
wheel center.
3. Turn the lug wrench clockwise
until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle. The
lug wrench will click when the tire
is raised to the stowed position. It
will not allow you to overtighten.
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the
catalytic converter may become damaged.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
244
Roadside emergencies
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
+
245
–
–
Roadside emergencies
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to the provided
jumpstarting bolt ONLY. Connecting to any other exposed component
may cause an explosion.
Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as
grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
246
Roadside emergencies
4.0L Engine
4.6L Engine
247
Roadside emergencies
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
248
Roadside emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
249
Roadside emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
250
Maintenance and care
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• When the engine is running, make sure that loose clothing, jewelry or
long hair does not get caught up in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle
conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in the
Battery section of this chapter.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First).
3. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
4. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
251
Maintenance and care
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in
neutral.
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at any time.
Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
(rearward) release handle located
under the bottom left corner of the
instrument panel.
252
Maintenance and care
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
253
Maintenance and care
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.0L SOHC V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Power distribution box
6. Battery
7. Power steering fluid reservoir
8. Air filter assembly
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
254
Maintenance and care
4.6L V8 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Clutch fluid reservoir (if equipped)
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Power distribution box
6. Battery
7. Power steering fluid reservoir
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Air filter assembly
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
255
Maintenance and care
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
• 4.0L V6 engine
256
Maintenance and care
• 4.6L V8 engine
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable, DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level
within the MIN-MAX range .
257
Maintenance and care
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine
• 4.6L V8 engine
• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
258
Maintenance and care
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX hole on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn or until three clicks can be heard.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine Oil Recommendations
4.6L Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting
Ford Specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum
fuel economy and durability performance meeting all
requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
259
Maintenance and care
4.0L Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting
Ford Specification WSS-M2C205–H.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the scheduled maintenance guide.
Engine Oil Filter Recommendation
Change your engine oil filter according to the appropriate schedule listed
in the scheduled maintenance guide. Ford production and aftermarket
(Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long
life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford Material
and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be
experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine.
260
Maintenance and care
BRAKE FLUID
AND CLUTCH FLUID
Checking and adding brake fluid/clutch fluid
When equipped with a manual
transmission, your vehicle uses the
same reservoir for brake and clutch
fluid.
Brake/clutch fluid should be
checked and refilled as needed.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt or water from entering the reservoir.
2. Visually inspect the fluid level.
3. If necessary, add brake/clutch
fluid from a clean un-opened
MAX
container until the level reaches
MAX. Do not fill above this line.
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid
certified to meet Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant specifications
in the Capacities and specifications chapter.
Brake fluid/clutch fluid is toxic. If brake/clutch fluid contacts the
eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical
attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and
induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause
permanent damage to your brakes.
Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This
may cause the brakes to fail.
261
Maintenance and care
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Windshield washer fluid
Check the washer fluid whenever
you stop for fuel. The reservoir is
highlighted with a
symbol.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.
Refer to Lubricant specifications in the Capacities and specifications
chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling
system components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions
in the Adding engine coolant section.
262
Maintenance and care
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F).
• Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon
application).
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
263
Maintenance and care
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored
Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification
ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your
vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored),
VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in
Oregon), depending on the type of coolant originally equipped
in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle
requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6,
darkens the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
264
Maintenance and care
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
• Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved
recycling process (see Use of Recycled engine coolant section).
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant
degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow
system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking Engine Coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
265
Maintenance and care
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant
produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped
with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not
all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford
specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine
and cooling system components.
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in the Capacities and specifications chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this chapter.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]), it
may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%.
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant
concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection.
Never increase the engine coolant concentration above 60%
(protection to –60°F). At a level over 60%, your engine could overheat
and become damaged.
If you drive in extremely hot climates, it is still necessary to maintain the
coolant concentration at 50/50 coolant and water. Do not allow the
coolant concentration to fall below 40% coolant. At a concentration
266
Maintenance and care
less than 40%, the corrosion protection to your engine and cooling
components may be compromised and permanent damage may result.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
(4.6L V8 engine only)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
and the
symbol
• The
will illuminate.
• The “Service Engine Soon”
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
267
Maintenance and care
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use
only MERCONt ATF.
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine
• 4.6L V8 engine
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
268
Maintenance and care
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
5. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the correct operating range. Be sure to put the
cap back on the reservoir.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, fluid
should be added by a qualified technician.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
269
Maintenance and care
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Make sure the vehicle is on a
level surface or level hoist.
2. Clean the filler plug or dirt and
debris.
3. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
4. Fluid level should be at bottom of
the opening.
5. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid level
is at the bottom of the opening.
6. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Lubricant
Specifications in this chapter.
270
Maintenance and care
CHECKING AND ADDING TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant
Specifications in the Capacities and specifications chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.
271
Maintenance and care
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
272
Maintenance and care
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start
the engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim
strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
273
Maintenance and care
R
TU
LE
AD
RE
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
N
RECYCLE
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.
Checking the wiper blades
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.
Changing the wiper blades
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
windshield and lock into the service
position.
2. Turn the blade at an angle from
the wiper arm. Push the lock pin
manually to release the blade and
pull the wiper blade down toward
the windshield to remove it from the
arm.
3. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard.
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
Refer to Windshield wiper blades in this section for more information
on rear wiper blades.
274
Maintenance and care
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climates.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
275
Maintenance and care
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
SERVICING YOUR TIRES
Checking the tire pressure
• Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.
• Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or has been driven less than 5 km
(3 miles). As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up,
increasing the tire pressure.
• Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the
Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door.
• Check tires for proper air pressure monthly. Check spare tire for
proper air pressure every six months.
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control.
276
Maintenance and care
Tire rotation
Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate
them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that
the tires wear unevenly, have them checked.
• Four tire rotation
• Five tire rotation
277
Maintenance and care
Replacing the tires
Replace the tires when the wear
band is visible through the tire
treads.
When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or
bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle may not drive properly and safely.
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type,
load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”,
“Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.
Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger
size tires.
Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the
handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose
control and roll over.
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also
affect the accuracy of your speedometer.
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning
message indicating when tire pressure is severely low or high. This
system is a supplement to normal tire maintenance including regular
manual inspections. The device will inform the operator of severe low or
high inflation pressures, but may not illuminate for less severe
discrepancies in inflation pressure.
The system uses radio-frequency pressure sensors to monitor the tire
pressure on all tires including the spare. The sensors transmit the tire
278
Maintenance and care
pressure readings to the receiver module located in the vehicle. The
receiver module then transmits the status to the message center. For
more tire warning information, refer to the Message Center in the
Driver controls chapter.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for
checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see Checking the
tire pressure in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your tire
pressure could increase the risk of tire failure and the potential for
personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
It is recommended that you always
have your tires serviced by a dealer
or qualified technician. Each tire is
equipped with a tire pressure
sensor mounted on the wheel
inside the tire behind the valve
stem. The tire pressure sensor
must be unbolted from the wheel prior to tire removal. The
sensor can be removed by loosening the nut at the valve stem.
Failure to remove the sensor may damage it. The rubber grommet
(washer) between the wheel and the tire pressure sensor needs to be
replaced when any tire is changed to minimize air leaks.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, refer to Checking the tire pressure in this chapter.
USING SNOW TIRES AND TRACTION DEVICES
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, using snow tires or traction
devices may be necessary. Ford offers tire cables as a Ford approved
279
Maintenance and care
accessory and recommends use of these or SAE class “S”. See your
dealer or qualified service technician for more information on tire cables
for your vehicle.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices:
• Cables or chains should only be used on the rear wheels.
• Install cables or chains securely, verifying that the cables or chains do
not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against
the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the
cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage.
• Avoid overloading your vehicle.
• Remove the cables or chains when they are no longer needed.
• Do not use cables or chains on dry roads.
• Do not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph) with tire cables or chains on your
vehicle.
Consult your dealer for information on other Ford approved methods of
traction control.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
280
Maintenance and care
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly
toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for
hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
• FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol. Any fuel
blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as
“Fuel Ethanol ”. To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, check your VIN
or the label on the inside of your fuel filler door. When checking the
VIN look for the engine type identifier (8th character). If your vehicle
is an FFV, then the character will be labeled as a “K.”
281
Maintenance and care
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn
and sugar cane. When ethanol is used in the making of motor fuels, a
small amount of a bad tasting chemical is added to discourage beverage
use. The resulting fuel is called Ed100 meaning 100% pure ethanol
diluted by 2% to 5% gasoline as the “denaturant.”
Fuel ethanol (summer blendd) is then made by adding 15% more
unleaded gasoline. The resulting fuel also has a higher octane rating than
unleaded regular gasoline and other properties which allow engine
designs with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 30% (E70)unleaded gasoline (25% plus
the denaturant) to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold weather
may require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer to Cold
Weather Starting in the Driving chapter.
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded gasoline fuel
components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle is not
serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures, damage
may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
282
Maintenance and care
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED
FUEL and (E85) ETHANOL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily under most
driving conditions while you are
(R+M)/2 METHOD
using fuel with the recommended
octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent
any engine damage.
Unleaded Gasoline engines
Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with an
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of gasolines
labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in
high altitude areas.
FFV engine (if equipped)
Your vehicle is designed to use (E85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded
gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined.
U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to have a small, square, orange and black label with the
common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that
region. Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your
warranty may be invalidated.
87
283
Maintenance and care
Fuel quality
Many of the world’s automakers
issued the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline
specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control
system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide
Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier
about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada,
look for fuels that display the Auto Makers’ Choicey logo.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Unleaded Gasoline engines
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded
gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly
in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become
more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
FFV engine (if equipped)
Your FFV will operate well on ordinary “Regular” unleaded gasoline, but
only the highest quality fuel ethanol will provide the same level of
protection and performance. To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, check
your VIN or the label on the inside of your fuel filler door. When
checking the VIN, look for the engine type identifier (8th character). If
your vehicle is an FFV, then the character will be labeled as a “K.”
If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, you
should follow a different maintenance schedule. See the Scheduled
Maintenance Guide for more information.
If you are experiencing a rough or rolling idle after start-up with the
outside temperature above 27° C (80° F), the idle should improve within
10 to 30 seconds. If the problems persist below this temperature, see
your dealer or a qualified service technician.
284
Maintenance and care
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.
If the “Check Fuel Cap” indicator comes on and stays on after you start
the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the
engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
285
Maintenance and care
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles)
of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 3,000 km–5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
286
Maintenance and care
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Filling the tank for FFV equipped vehicles
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results it is
recommended that you do not add less than 5 gallons of fuel when
refueling. Observing this precaution will avoid possible hard starting
and/or deterioration in drivability during warm up.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in kilometers or miles).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters
or gallons).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers
traveled.
Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
287
Maintenance and care
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
288
Maintenance and care
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
Flex fuel (E-85) cruising range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline, you will
experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your Miles
Per Gallon (MPG) and your driving range to decrease by about 30%
compared to gasoline operation.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
289
Maintenance and care
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance
guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the “Check Engine” light, charging system warning light
or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or
loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is
not working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine
Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrumentation chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on.
290
Maintenance and care
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
BULBS
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of the following lamps frequently:
• Headlamps
• Foglamps
• High-mount brakelamp
• Brakelamps
• Parking lamps
• Turn signal lamps
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamps
• Back-up lamps
Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with
new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time,
contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance.
291
Maintenance and care
Replacing headlamp bulbs
The high beam and low beam bulbs are located in the headlamp
assembly. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb:
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open the hood.
2. At the back of the headlamp, pry
up the two retainer pins until they
stop to release the headlamp
assembly from the vehicle and pull
headlamp forward.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by pushing
the center tab and pulling
downward.
4. Remove the old bulb from the
lamp assembly by turning counter
clockwise to unlock and pulling it
straight out of the lamp assembly.
To install the new bulb:
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing
alcohol before being used.
292
Maintenance and care
1. Install the new bulb in lamp assembly by pushing straight in and
turning to lock in position. You may need to turn the bulb slightly to
align the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the lamp assembly.
2. Connect the electrical connector to the bulb.
3. Install the headlamp on the vehicle by aligning the lamp on the
vehicle, push rearward to fully seat the lamp assembly then push the two
retainer pins down.
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aimed before you changed the bulb, you should
not need to aim it again.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open the hood.
2. Remove screw from the lamp
assembly.
3. Disengage lamp assembly by
pulling forward.
4. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of
socket and push in the new bulb.
6. Install bulb socket in lamp
assembly by turning clockwise.
7. Align the parking lamp studs with
the plastic grommets on the vehicle and push rearward to snap in place.
8. Install screw on lamp assembly.
293
Maintenance and care
Replacing tail/brake/turn/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/brake/turn/backup bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly,
one just below the other. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open the liftgate
to expose the lamp assembly
screws.
2. Remove the two screws from the
lamp assembly.
3. Pull the lamp assembly towards
the rear and side of the vehicle at
an angle carefully removing it from
the vehicle.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
6. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Replacing foglamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then reach under the
front bumper and remove the bulb
socket from the foglamp by turning
counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the foglamp bulb.
3. Connect the electrical connector
to the new foglamp bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in the foglamp turning clockwise.
294
Maintenance and care
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then remove two
screws and the license plate lamp
assembly from the liftgate.
2. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the lamp assembly on
liftgate with two screws.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then remove the two
screws and move the lamp assembly
away from the liftgate.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the
lamp assembly by depressing the
snaps.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
To complete installation, follow the
removal procedure in reverse order.
295
Maintenance and care
USING THE RIGHT BULBS
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade number
Park/turn lamps
2
3157 AK (amber)
(front)
Headlamp high beam
2
9005
Headlamp low beam
2
9006
Rear stop/turn/tail
2
3157K
lamps
Rear license plate
2
168
lamps
Backup lamp
2
3156K
High-mount stop
5
W5W
lamps
Fog lamp
2
9145
Cargo lamp
1
211-2
Interior overhead lamp
1
912 (906)
Front door courtesy
1
168
lamp
Map lamps
2
168 (T10)
Ashtray lamp
1
161
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer.
296
Maintenance and care
VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface approximately 7.6 meters (25 feet)
from a vertical wall or screen directly in front of it.
• (1) Eight feet
• (2) Center height of lamp to ground
• (3) Twenty-five feet
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp to the
ground and mark a 2.4 meter (8
foot) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape
works well). The center of the lamp
is marked by a 3.0 mm circle on the
headlamp lens.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge of high
intensity light with a slight angle
towards the right. If this edge is not
at the horizontal reference line, the
beam will need to be adjusted.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a 4 mm
socket/wrench to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to adjust
down) or clockwise (to adjust up)
aligning the upper edge of the light
pattern up to the horizontal line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
297
Maintenance and care
CLEANING AND CARING FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the Accessories chapter for a list of Ford-approved cleaners,
polishes and sealants.
Washing the exterior
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your
dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Waxing
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
298
Maintenance and care
Paint chips
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
Aluminum wheels and covers
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.
In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A), which is
available from your dealer.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Removal (B7A-19520–AA), available from your dealer.
Engine
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high
pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
299
Maintenance and care
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
4.6L V8 Engine
4.0L SOHC V6 Engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
300
Maintenance and care
Plastic (non-painted) exterior parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and
Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA).
Windows and wiper blades
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned
regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree
sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow
these tips:
• The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive
cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23),
available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Instrument panel and cluster lens
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces.
301
Maintenance and care
Wood-tone trim
• Clean the area with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping with a dry, soft,
clean cloth.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
Interior
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Ford Extra Strength Upholstery
Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
Leather seats (if equipped)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
302
Maintenance and care
Ford, Lincoln and Mercury car care products
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada)
(F2AZ—19530–A)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-11–A)
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in
Canada) (B7A-19520–AA)
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(E8AZ-19523–AA)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate (F2SZ-19523–WC)
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Detailer (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name
303
Capacities and specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element
Fuel filter
Battery
Oil filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs*
4.0L SOHC V6 engine 4.6L V8 engine
FA-1695
FA-1695
FG-986B
FG-986B
BXT-65-650
BXT-65-650
FL-820S
FL-820S
EV-243
F6ZE-6C324-CA
AGSF-22PP **
AWSF-32P
* Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark
plug gap information.
** If a spark plug is removed for inspection, it must be reinstalled in the
same cylinder. If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use only spark plugs
with the service number suffix letter as shown on the engine decal.
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid
Brake fluid and
Clutch fluid (if
equipped)
Engine oil
(including filter
change)
Fuel tank
304
Ford Part
Name
Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Motorcraft SAE
5W-30 Super
Premium Motor
Oil
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
N/A
Application
Capacity
All
Fill to line on
reservoir
4.0L
4.7L
(5.0 quarts)
4.6L
5.7L
(6.0 quarts)
All
85.2L
(22.5 gallons)
Capacities and specifications
Fluid
Power steering
fluid
Transmission
fluid 1
Transfer case
Engine coolant
Front axle
lubricant
4
Ford Part
Name
Motorcraft
MERCONt ATF
Application
Capacity
All
Motorcraft
MERCONt ATF
Motorcraft
MERCONtV
ATF
5-speed manual
Fill between the
MIN and MAX
lines on
reservoir
2.4L
(5.1 pints) 2
12.0L
(12.7 quarts)3
Motorcraft
MERCONt ATF
Motorcraft
Premium Engine
Coolant
(green-colored)
or Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
4WD
Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Automatic
transmissions
only.
4.0L SOHC V6
engine without
auxiliary climate
control
4.0L SOHC V6
engine with
auxiliary climate
control
4.6L V8 engine
without
auxiliary climate
control
4.6L V8 engine
with auxiliary
climate control
4x4 vehicles
1.4L
(1.5 quarts)
15.4L
(16.3 quarts)
17.2L
(18.2 quarts)
17.6L
(18.6 quarts)
19.0L
(20.1 quarts)
1.7L
(1.8 quarts)
305
Capacities and specifications
Fluid
Rear axle
lubricant 5
Windshield
washer fluid
Ford Part
Name
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
Application
Capacity
Conventional
Axle
1.7L
(3.5 pints)
Limited slip
axle 6
1.5L
(3.25 pints)
All
4.0L
(4.2 quarts)
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCONt and
MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and
MERCONt V. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine
the correct service interval.
2
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be checked by a qualified
technician.
4
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
5
All rear axles are filled with Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance
Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant, part number XY—75W140–QL or
equivalent meeting Ford Specification WSL-M2C192–A.
6
Limited Slip differentials must add 118ml (4 oz) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL—3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118–A
to the rear axle whenever the axle has been serviced.
306
Capacities and specifications
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Ford Part
Name or
equivalent
Ford Part
Number
Ford
Specification
Body hinges,
latches, door
striker plates
and rotors, seat
tracks, fuel filler
door hinge and
spring, hood
latch, auxiliary
latch, seat
tracks
Multi-Purpose
Grease or
Multi-Purpose
Grease Spray
XG–4 or XL–5
ESR-M1C159-A
or
ESB-M1C93–B
PM-1
ESA-M6C25-A,
DOT 3
XG-1-C or
XG-1-K
ESA-M1C75-B
Motorcraft High
Hydraulic brake Performance
fluid and Clutch
DOT 3 Motor
Fluid (if
Vehicle Brake
equipped)
Fluid
Driveshaft, slip
Premium Long
spline, universal Life Grease
joints
Engine coolant
Motorcraft
Premium Engine
Coolant
(green-colored)
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
Motorcraft SAE
Super
4.0L Engine oil 5W30
Premium Motor
Oil
Motorcraft SAE
Premium
4.6L Engine oil 5W20
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
VC-4-A (US) or
CXC-10
(Canada)
ESE-M97B44-A
VC-7–A
WSSM97B51-A1
XO-5W30-QSP
XO -5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C205-A
with API
Certification
Mark
WSS-M2C153–H
with API
Certification
Mark
307
Capacities and specifications
Ford Part
Name or
equivalent
Motorcraft
Automatic
MERCONtV
transmission 1
ATF
Motorcraft
Power steering MERCON t
fluid
Multi-Purpose
ATF
Ford
75W-140 High
conventional and Performance
Traction-Lok
Synthetic Rear
rear axles
Axle Lubricant2
Motorcraft SAE
Front axle
80W-90
(4X4)
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft
Transfer case
MERCONt
(4X4)
Multi-Purpose
ATF
Motorcraft
5-speed manual MERCONt
transmission
Multi-Purpose
ATF
Transfer case
Premium
Front Output
Long-Life Grease
Slip Shaft
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Windshield
washer fluid
Washer
Concentrate
Item
1
Ford Part
Number
Ford
Specification
XT-5-QM
MERCONtV
XT-2-QDX
MERCONt
XY-75W140–QL
WSL-M2C192_A
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-A
XT-2-QDX
MERCONt
XT-2-QDX
MERCONt
XG-1-C or
XG-1-K
ESA-M1C75-B
ZC—32–A
WSB-M8B16–A2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCONt and
MERCONt V are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and
MERCONt V. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine
the correct service interval.
308
Capacities and specifications
2
Limited slip differentials must add 118 ml (4 oz) of Additive Friction
Modifier XL—3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A
to the rear axle whenever the axle has been serviced.
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio
4.0L SOHC V6
engine
245
87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
1.3-1.4 mm
(0.052-0.056
inch)
EDIS
9.7:1
4.6L V8 engine
281
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
1.3-1.4 mm
(0.052-0.056
inch)
EDIS
9.4:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Dimensions
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(5)
Overall length
Overall width
Maximum height*
Wheelbase
Track width, front
Track width, rear
4-Door 4x2 or 4x4 XLT Model mm
(in.)
4812 (189.5)
1832 (72.1)
1828 (71.9)
2889 (113.7)
1547 (60.9)
1554 (61.2)
* Height includes roof rack and P255/70R16 tire
309
Capacities and specifications
4
1
3
5
2
310
Capacities and specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the front door latch pillar on the
driver’s side.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is a 17 digit combination of
letters and numbers. The VIN is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. The VIN number
is also found on the Certification
label. (Please note that in the
graphic XXXX is representative of
your vehicle identification number.)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
311
Capacities and specifications
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).
312
Customer assistance
Ford Extended Service Plan
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in
Canada). It provides the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact
your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to
change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended
Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at
www.ford-esp.com.
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the authorized
dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are
needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs.
Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all
dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that
depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be
taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership cannot assist you, then
contact the Customer Relationship Center.
313
Customer assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership.
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level,
please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
314
Customer assistance
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please
have the following information available when contacting a Customer
Relationship Center:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
315
Customer assistance
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. only)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
316
Customer assistance
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
317
Customer assistance
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the
Board at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 5120
Southfield, MI 48086–5120
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
318
Customer assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
319
Customer assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
Ford accessories for your vehicle
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln Mercury or Ford of
Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically
engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to
complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In
addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets
or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford
accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for
whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or
• The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60 000 km (36 000 miles)
(whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of
the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
320
Customer assistance
Vehicle Security
Styled wheel locks
Vehicle security systems
Comfort and convenience
Cargo net
Cargo organizers
Cargo shade
Cargo tray
Engine block heaters
Tire step
Travel equipment
Ash cup
Automatic headlamps with daytime running lights (DRL)
Cargo Organizer
Cellular phone holder
Cellular phone hands free system with voice recognition
Daytime running lights (DRL)
Dog guard
Factory luggage rack adaptors (bike and ski)
First aid kit
Fog lamps
Full vehicle cover
Highway safety kit
Inside mirror, electrochromic compass (with and without temperature
display)
Luggage/Cargo basket
Luggage basket light bracket
Luggage divider
Luggage rack cross bars
Navigation system
Neutral towing transfer case kit
321
Customer assistance
Remote start system
Removable luggage rack adapters (bike and ski)
Running boards/bars
Seatback storage
Scuff plates
Smoker’s package
Soft luggage cover
Track rider bars (for luggage rack)
Trailer hitch (Class III)
Trailer hitch (Class IV)
Trailer hitch bars and balls
Trailer hitch mount bike carrier
Trailer hitch receiver cover
Trailer hitch wiring adaptor
Trailgate table and adaptor
Protection and appearance equipment
Air bag anti-theft locks
All-weather floor mats
Cargo liners, interior
Carpet floor mats
Door edge guards
Front end covers (full and sport)
Front hood deflectors
Locking gas cap
Molded splash guards
Rear air deflector
Side window air deflectors
Skid plate
Tow hooks
Universal floor mats
322
Customer assistance
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may
cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be
damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily
affect your vehicle’s operation.)
• Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage
that may result from the use of such equipment.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
323
Customer assistance
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 29,000 km (18,000 miles), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
324
Reporting safety defects
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
325
Index
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................187
Accessory delay ........................109
Air bag supplemental restraint
system ................................163, 168
and child safety seats ............165
description ......................163, 168
disposal ....................................171
driver air bag ..................165, 169
indicator light ...........10, 167, 171
operation .........................165, 169
passenger air bag ...........165, 169
Air cleaner filter .......................304
Air conditioning ..........................36
automatic temperature
control system ..........................40
auxiliary heater and air
conditioner ................................50
rear seat controls .....................51
Ambulance packages ....................3
Antifreeze (see Engine
coolant) .....................................262
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................187–189
Anti-theft system ......................128
arming the system ..................129
disarming a triggered
system .....................................130
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................55, 67, 76
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................196
fluid, adding ............................269
fluid, checking ........................269
fluid, refill capacities ..............304
fluid, specification ..................309
Auxiliary power point ...............113
326
Axle
lubricant specifications ..307, 309
refill capacities ........................304
B
Battery .......................................272
acid, treating emergencies .....272
charging system warning
light ............................................12
jumping a disabled battery ....244
maintenance-free ....................272
replacement, specifications ...304
servicing ..................................272
voltage gauge ............................16
BeltMinder .................................158
Brakes ........................................187
anti-lock ...........................187–189
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light .....................11, 188
brake warning light ..................10
fluid, checking and adding ....261
fluid, refill capacities ..............304
fluid, specifications .........307, 309
lubricant specifications ..307, 309
parking ....................................189
pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) ...............................33
shift interlock ..........................194
Break-in period .............................3
Bulbs ..........................................291
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....304
Cargo cover ...............................115
CD-6 disc .....................................76
CD-single .....................................61
CD-single premium .....................67
Certification Label ....................311
Index
Changing a tire .........................237
Child safety restraints ..............172
child safety belts ....................172
Child safety seats ......................174
attaching with tether straps ..179
in front seat ............................176
in rear seat ......................176, 178
Cleaning your vehicle ...............298
engine compartment ..............299
instrument panel ....................301
interior .....................................302
plastic parts ............................301
washing ....................................298
waxing .....................................298
wheels ......................................299
wiper blades ............................301
woodtone trim ........................302
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............36
Clock ..........................60, 66, 74, 88
Clutch
operation while driving ..........199
recommended shift speeds ....200
Compass, electronic ....................17
calibration .................................19
set zone adjustment ...........18, 21
Console ......................................112
overhead ..........................100–101
rear ..........................................113
Controls
power seat ...............................136
steering column ........................98
Coolant
checking and adding ..............262
refill capacities ................266, 304
specifications ..................307, 309
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................92
Customer Assistance ................225
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .............................303, 320
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................313
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................319
Getting roadside assistance ...225
Getting the service you
need .........................................313
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................323
The Dispute Settlement
Board .......................................316
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................319
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................31
Defrost
rear window ..............................54
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................269
engine oil .................................256
Doors
door ajar warning .....................12
lubricant specifications ..........307
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................271
Driving under special
conditions ..........................207, 210
sand .........................................209
snow and ice ...........................211
through water .................210, 216
E
Electronic message center .........19
327
Index
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................244
Engine ........................................309
check engine/service engine
soon light ....................................8
cleaning ...................................299
coolant .....................................262
fail-safe coolant ......................267
idle speed control ...................272
lubrication
specifications ..................307, 309
refill capacities ........................304
service points ..................254–255
starting after a collision .........226
Engine block heater .................185
Engine oil ..................................256
checking and adding ..............256
dipstick ....................................256
filter, specifications ........259, 304
recommendations ...................259
refill capacities ........................304
specifications ..................307, 309
Exhaust fumes ..........................186
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................193
Fuel ............................................280
calculating fuel
economy ............................22, 286
cap .......................................9, 285
capacity ...................................304
choosing the right fuel ...........283
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................289
detergent in fuel .....................285
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................280, 285–286
filter, specifications ........286, 304
fuel pump shut-off switch .....226
gauge .........................................17
improving fuel economy ........286
octane rating ...................283, 309
quality ......................................284
running out of fuel .................285
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................280
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .................................280, 283
Fuses ..................................227, 229
F
G
Fail safe cooling ........................267
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....280
Floor mats .................................114
Fluid capacities .........................304
Foglamps .....................................31
Four-Wheel Drive
vehicles ................................12, 201
control trac .......................54, 201
description ......................202, 205
driving off road .......................206
electronic shift ..........................54
Garage door opener ..........101, 103
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ........9, 285
Gas mileage (see Fuel
economy) ...................................286
Gauges .........................................14
battery voltage gauge ...............16
engine coolant temperature
gauge .........................................15
engine oil pressure gauge ........17
fuel gauge ..................................17
odometer ...................................15
speedometer .............................14
Emission control system ..........289
328
Index
tachometer ................................16
trip odometer ............................16
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) .......................................214
calculating ...............................216
definition .................................214
driving with a heavy load ......214
location ....................................214
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) .......................................214
calculating .......................214, 216
definition .................................214
driving with a heavy load ......214
location ....................................214
H
Hazard flashers .........................226
Head restraints .................135, 140
Headlamps ...................................31
aiming ......................................297
autolamp system .......................33
bulb specifications ..................296
daytime running lights .............31
flash to pass ..............................32
high beam ...........................11, 32
replacing bulbs .......................292
turning on and off ....................31
warning chime ..........................13
Heating ........................................36
heating and air conditioning
system .......................................36
rear seat controls .....................51
HomeLink universal
transceiver (see Garage door
opener) ..............103–104, 106–107
Hood ..........................................252
I
Ignition .................................92, 309
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................174
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................290
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................301
cluster ..........................................8
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................32
location of components ..............8
J
Jack ....................................237, 239
positioning .......................237, 240
storage .....................237–238, 243
Jump-starting your vehicle ......244
K
Keyless entry system ...............122
autolock ...................................126
keypad .....................................122
locking and unlocking doors ..125
programming entry code .......123
Keys ...................................131–133
key in ignition chime ...............13
positions of the ignition ...........92
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................33
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................296
cargo lamps ...............................32
daytime running light ...............31
fog lamps ...................................31
headlamps .................................31
headlamps, flash to pass ..........32
instrument panel, dimming .....32
329
Index
interior lamps .........................102
replacing bulbs ...............291–295
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................91
Liftgate ..............................114, 118
Lights, warning and indicator ......8
AdvanceTrac .............................12
air bag ........................................10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....11, 188
brake ..........................................10
charging system ........................12
check coolant ......................10–11
cruise indicator .........................13
door ajar ....................................12
engine oil pressure ...................11
fuel cap light ...............................9
high beam .................................11
low washer fluid .......................12
overdrive off ..............................13
safety belt .................................10
service engine soon ....................8
speed control ............................96
turn signal indicator .................11
Limited-slip axle .......................214
Load limits .................................214
GAWR ......................................214
GVWR ......................................214
trailer towing ..........................214
Loading instructions .................216
Locks
autolock ...................................126
childproof ................................111
doors ........................................110
Lubricant specifications ...307, 309
Lumbar support, seats .............139
M
Manual transmission .................199
330
fluid capacities ........................304
lubricant specifications ..........309
reverse .....................................201
Message center .....................19–20
english/metric button ...............25
system check button ................25
warning messages .....................25
Mirrors .......................................108
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ......................................107
fold away .................................112
heated ......................................112
side view mirrors (power) .....111
Moon roof ..................................102
Motorcraft parts ................286, 304
O
Octane rating ............................283
Odometer .....................................15
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................256
P
Panic alarm feature, remote
entry system ..............................118
Parking brake ............................189
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....304
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) .................................33
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................233
Power door locks ......................110
Power mirrors ...........................111
Power point ...............................113
Power steering ..........................193
fluid, checking and adding ....268
Index
fluid, refill capacity ................304
fluid, specifications .........307, 309
Power Windows .........................108
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................193
R
Radio ................................55, 67, 76
Radio reception ...........................90
Rear window defroster ...............54
Relays ................................227, 236
Remote entry system .......116, 118
illuminated entry ....................121
locking/unlocking
doors ................................117, 128
opening the trunk ...................118
panic alarm .............................118
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................120
replacing the batteries ...........119
Reverse sensing system .............33
Roadside assistance ..................225
Roof rack ...................................224
S
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ... 13, 147, 149, 151–153, 157
Safety Canopy ...................168–169
Safety defects, reporting ..........325
Safety restraints .. 147, 149, 151–153, 156–157
belt minder .............................158
cleaning the safety belts ........162
extension assembly ................157
for adults .........................151–153
for children .....................171–172
lap belt ....................................154
warning light and
chime ...................10, 13, 157–158
Safety seats for children ..........174
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............147
Seats ..........................................135
child safety seats ....................174
heated ......................................139
memory seat ...................118, 138
SecuriLock passive
anti-theft system ...............131–133
Servicing your vehicle ..............251
Snowplowing .................................3
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................304, 309
Special notice ................................3
ambulance conversions ..............3
utility-type vehicles ....................3
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................307, 309
Speed control ..............................92
Speedometer ...............................14
Starting your
vehicle ........................182, 184–185
jump starting ..........................244
Steering wheel
controls ..........................92, 96, 98
tilting .........................................96
T
Tachometer .................................16
Tire warning ..............................278
Tires ...................237, 275–276, 278
331
Index
changing ..................237–238, 240
checking the pressure ............276
replacing ..................239–240, 278
rotating ....................................277
snow tires and chains ............279
tire grades ...............................276
treadwear ................................275
Towing .......................................217
recreational towing .................223
trailer towing ..........................217
wrecker ....................................250
Traction control ........................190
active light ................................12
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................271
Transmission .............................194
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................269
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................270
fluid, refill capacities ..............304
lubricant
specifications ..................307, 309
manual operation ....................199
Trip odometer .............................16
Trunk .........................................118
Turn signal ............................11, 91
332
V
Vehicle dimensions ...................309
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................311
Vehicle loading ..........................214
Ventilating your vehicle ...........186
W
Warning chimes ...........................13
Warning lights (see Lights) .........8
Washer fluid ..............................262
Water, Driving through .............216
Windows
power .......................................108
rear wiper/washer .....................98
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers
checking and adding fluid .....262
checking and cleaning ............274
liftgate reservoir .....................262
operation ...................................97
replacing wiper blades ...........274
Wrecker towing .........................250
333
334
335
Filling station information
Item
Required fuel
Fuel tank capacity
4.0L Engine oil capacity (includes
filter change)
4.6L Engine oil capacity (includes
filter change)
Tire size and pressure
Hood release
Coolant capacity-(4.0L SOHC V6
engine without auxiliary climate
control) 1
Coolant capacity-(4.0L SOHC V6
engine with auxiliary climate control) 1
Coolant capacity (4.6L V8 engine
without auxiliary climate control) 1
Coolant capacity (4.6L V8 engine with
auxiliary climate control) 1
Power steering fluid capacity
Manual transmission fluid capacity 2
Automatic transmission fluid capacity
(5R55W transmission) 2
1
Information
Unleaded fuel only - 87 octane
85.2L (22.5 gallons)
4.7L (5.0 quarts). Use Motorcraft SAE
5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil, Ford
specification WSS-M2C153-G.
5.7L (6.0 quarts). Use Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil, Ford
specification WSS-M2C153-H.
Refer to the Certification Label on
inside of driver’s door.
Pull handle under the instrument
panel.
15.4L (16.3 quarts)
17.2L (18.2 quarts)
17.6L (18.6 quarts)
19.0L (20.1 quarts)
Fill to line on reservoir. Use Motorcraft
MERCONt ATF.
2.4L (5.1 pints). Use Motorcraft
MERCONt ATF.
12.0L (12.7 quarts). Use Motorcraft
MERCONt V ATF. 3
Use either green-colored Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant or yellow-colored
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant. DO NOT USE Ford Extended Life
Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine coolant, in the
Maintenance and Care chapter.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. MERCONt and MERCONt V
are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Refer to your
scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. The amount of transmission fluid
and fluid level should be checked by a qualified technician.
336